JP2019076269A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To further increase game amusement after a ready-to-win is achieved in a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine 1 has a main control board 110, a performance control board 120, an image control board 150, and an image display device 31. The main control board 110 of the game machine 1 controls progress of the game. The performance control board 120 of the game machine 1 shifts to be in a setting mode regarding the setting related to a lottery, when power is supplied with a setting key 177 in a predetermined state. The performance control board 120 displays an image corresponding to a predetermined command, if a command received when the main control board 110 is in the setting mode is a predetermined command.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 14

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a bullet-type pachinko gaming machine.

  The pachinko game machine is provided with a main control board which controls the progress of the game, and a production control board which controls the production of the game through the control of the liquid crystal display of the game board and the features. Among the gaming machines, there is one that shifts to a special mode such as a store setting mode by turning on the power switch while pressing the effect button. Patent Document 1 is a document disclosing a technology related to this type of gaming machine.

JP, 2014-239952, A

  By the way, in this type of game machine, if cooperation between the main control board and the effect control board is not smoothly performed, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be lost.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to smoothly perform cooperation between a main control board and a presentation control board in a gaming machine.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention executes each lottery including a jackpot lottery, controls the progress of the game based on the result of the lottery, and generates a plurality of types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game. The main control means to be obtained, the effect means for displaying an image and outputting sound, and the command in the main control means are received, the control content of the effect means is determined based on the received command, and the effect is performed according to this determination A game machine comprising effect control means for controlling means and operation means for performing an operation related to setting of the main control means, wherein each of the main control means and the effect control means is triggered by power on. Independent operation is possible, and when the power is turned on with the operation means in a predetermined state, the main control means shifts to a setting mode relating to settings relating to the lottery, Performance control means, when the command the main control unit receives the When in the setting mode is the predetermined command, provides a game machine, characterized in that to display an image corresponding to the predetermined command.

  According to the present invention, cooperation between the main control board and the effect control board in the gaming machine can be smoothly performed.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a mode that the 1st movable role thing 330a in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 descend | falls. It is a figure which shows a mode that the 2nd movable role thing 330b in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 inclines. It is a figure which shows a mode that the 3rd movable role thing 330c in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 opens and closes. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of jackpot in the game machine shown in FIG. 1, and the combination of the left symbol 36L, the inside symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the 4th symbol 36Z. It is a figure which shows the mode of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. . It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of the game machine shown in FIG. It is an assembly drawing which shows the presentation control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the main command of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change mode process of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation mode process of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power supply interruption monitoring process of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the input control processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the special symbol suspension storage area of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1, and the effect information storage area of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the prior determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure electric power control processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination table and normal symbol lottery determination table of a game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the special game control table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the big winning a prize opening opening / closing control table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game end processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the setting table at the time of a special game end of a gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the figure common control control processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of the presentation control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of the presentation control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change alerting | reporting image display control processing of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special command analysis process in setting change of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows game command analysis processing during setting change of a production control board of a gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation alerting | reporting image display control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a special command analysis process in setting confirmation of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a game command analysis process in setting confirmation of the production control board of a gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation production pattern determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading effect production selection processing of a production control board of a game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the prefetch effect production execution determination table and the final-stage effect display mode determination table of the production control board of a game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the prefetch effect presentation scenario determination table of the presentation control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the prefetch effect presentation scenario determination table of the presentation control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol determination processing of the production | presentation control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows SP specific notice production selection processing of a production control board of a game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 7 is a view showing an SP-specific advance notice effect execution determination table and an SPU-specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart which shows the SPSP specific notice production selection process of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the SPSP specific notice production | presentation execution determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. 1, and SPSP specific notice production execution timing determination table. 7 is a flowchart showing a speech operation effect operation result determination process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a speech speaker determination table and a speech determination table of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. 7 is a flowchart showing a serif operation specific advance notice effect selection process of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. It is a figure which shows the speech operation specific advance presentation production execution determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. 1, and the speech operation specific announcement production execution timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the surprise operation specific notice production selection process of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the shortening fluctuation advance presentation execution determination table of a production control board of a game machine shown in FIG. 1, and a shortening fluctuation advance presentation execution timing determination table. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a process of selecting an effect of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the disconnection notice production | presentation execution determination table of the production control board of a game machine shown in FIG. 1, and a disconnection notice production | presentation execution timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the mode production control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change determination processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the stage change execution determination table of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the new stage determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the stage change timing determination table of the production control board of a game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change notice production | presentation selection process of the production control board of a game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change notice production | presentation selection process of the production control board of a game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change notice production | presentation selection process of the production control board of a game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the stage change notice production | presentation execution determination table of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the stage change notice production | presentation execution timing determination table of the production control board of a game machine shown in FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing stage change notice effect selection processing during symbol variation of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing stage change notice effect selection processing while the symbol of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is stopped. It is a flowchart which shows the special game presentation selection process of the presentation control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the round game presentation control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the training mode start control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the live mode start control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation input control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation input control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation input control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the content of the operation information storage area of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. 1, and the example of the update. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the stage change notice production | presentation execution timing determination table of the game machine which is 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the game machine which is a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the game machine which is a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the game machine which is a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the game machine which is a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the game machine which is 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an assembly drawing showing a production control board of a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation procedure of the game machine which is 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the game machine which is the 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the game machine which is the 9th embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the game machine which is the 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the game machine which is the 11th embodiment of the present invention.

First Embodiment
FIG. 1 is a front view of a game machine 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the entire configuration of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 1, the housing of the gaming machine 1 has a rectangular outer frame 60 and a glass door 50 that covers the game area 6 of the outer frame 60 in a visible manner.

  One end of the glass door 50 (the right side facing the gaming machine 1 and the left side) is connected to the outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism 51. A lock mechanism is provided at the other end of the glass door 50 (right side facing the gaming machine 1). When the lock mechanism of the glass door 50 is unlocked by a dedicated key, the glass door 50 can be swung by the hinge mechanism 51 to open the game area 6. The glass door 50 is provided with a door opening switch 18 a that detects the opening of the glass door 50.

  Outside the part covering the game area 6 in the glass door 50, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol hold indicator 23, the second special symbol hold indicator 24, ordinary A symbol display device 22 and a normal symbol hold indicator 25 are provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 reports the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed with the game ball entering the first starting opening 14 of the game area 6 (hereinafter referred to as “start winning” as appropriate). It is. The second special symbol display device 21 notifies the lottery result of a big hit lottery performed with the game ball entering the second starting opening 15 of the game area 6 (hereinafter referred to as “start winning” as appropriate). is there. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 variably display a plurality of types of special symbols that can be identified. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 are configured by seven segments of LEDs. In the following description, a special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 20 is appropriately referred to as a "first special symbol", and a special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 21 is appropriately "second special symbol Called "pattern".

  The first special symbol hold display 23 displays the number of pending changes of the first special symbol. The second special symbol hold display 24 displays the number of pending changes of the second special symbol.

  Here, the suspension of the change of the first special symbol is based on the establishment of the start condition established earlier, although the start condition for executing the change of the first special symbol is satisfied by the start winning of the first start port 14 It occurs when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when a special game is being executed.

  Similarly, the suspension of the change of the second special symbol is based on the establishment of the start condition established earlier, although the start condition for executing the change of the second special symbol is satisfied by the start winning of the second start port 15 It occurs when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when a special game is being executed.

  Each of the first special symbol hold display 23 and the second special symbol hold display 24 is composed of two left and right LEDs. The display mode of the number of reservations in the first special symbol hold display 23 and the second special symbol hold display 24 will be specifically described. In the first special symbol hold display 23, the number of changes in the first special symbol hold is In the case of one, the left LED lights. When the number of pending changes of the first special symbol is two, the right LED is lit. When the number of pending changes of the first special symbol is 3, the left LED blinks and the right LED lights. When the number of pending changes in the first special symbol is four, the two left and right LEDs blink. The display mode of the number of reservations in the second special symbol hold display 24 is the same as that of the first special symbol hold display 23.

  The normal symbol display device 22 reports the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery performed with the game ball passing through the normal symbol gate 13 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 22 variably displays a plurality of types of normal symbols that can identify each. The normal symbol hold display 25 is for displaying the number of pending changes of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold display 25 is composed of two left and right LEDs. The display mode of the number of reservations in the normal symbol hold display 25 is the same as that of the first special symbol hold display 23 and the second special symbol hold display 24.

  The game area 6 of the game machine 1 has a substantially egg shape. The game area 6 is divided into a left area 6L on the left side and a right area 6R on the right side than the center in the left-right direction. At the left end of the left area 6L, rails 5a and 5b extending in an arc shape are provided at an interval slightly larger than the game balls between each other. A ball return prevention piece 5c is provided at the upper end portion of the inner rail 5b among the rails 5a and 5b.

  Below the portion covering the game area 6 in the glass door 50, an effect button 35 is provided. The effect button 35 is for changing the effect mode by the pressing operation. The effect button detection switch 35 a is provided on the effect button 35. When the effect button detection switch 35 a detects that the effect button 35 is pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating that.

  At the left of the effect button 35, a cross key 39 is provided. The cross key 39 includes an upper cursor key 39A, a lower cursor key 39B, a left cursor key 39C, and a right cursor key 39D. A center key 39E is provided at a position surrounded by the upper cursor key 39A, the lower cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C, and the right cursor key 39D.

  In the upper cursor key 39A, the lower cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C, and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39, cross key detection switches 39a, 39b, 39c, and 39d are provided. The central key 39E is provided with a central key detection switch 39e. When it is detected that the upper cursor key 39A is pressed, the cross key detection switch 39a outputs an on signal indicating that. When it is detected that the lower cursor key 39B is pressed, the cross key detection switch 39b outputs an on signal indicating that. When it is detected that the left cursor key 39C is pressed, the cross key detection switch 39c outputs an on signal indicating that. When it is detected that the right cursor key 39D is pressed, the cross key detection switch 39d outputs an on signal indicating that. When the center key detection switch 39e detects that the center key 39E is pressed, it outputs an on signal indicating that.

  On the back side of the effect button 35 in the glass door 50, a tray for storing gaming balls is provided. At the lower right of the effect button 35 in the glass door 50, the operation handle 3 is provided. The player performs a firing operation which is an operation of holding the operation handle 3 with his / her right hand and turning it clockwise.

  A touch sensor 3 a is provided in the operation handle 3. The touch sensor 3a is formed of a capacitance type proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance caused by the player touching the operation handle 3. A ball feeding solenoid 4 b is provided in a receptacle of the glass door 50. The ball feed solenoid 4b is configured of a straight forward solenoid. In the vicinity of the pivoting portion of the operation handle 3, a firing volume 3b and a firing solenoid 4a are provided. The launch volume 3b is comprised of a variable resistor. The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid.

  Each of the units 3 a, 3 b, 4 a, 4 b performs an operation related to the firing of the gaming balls in the receptacle to the gaming area 6 under the control of the launch control board 160. More specifically, when the player's hand touches the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a supplies a touch signal indicating that to the launch control board 160. When the player's hand turns the operation handle 3, the emission volume 3 b outputs a voltage divided according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 3 to the emission control board 160. The emission control board 160 performs control to energize the emission solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b based on the output voltage of the emission volume 3b while the touch signal is supplied from the touch sensor 3a.

  By the energization control of the launch control board 160, the ball feed solenoid 4b sends out the game balls on the tray one by one toward the launch member directly connected to the launch solenoid 4a. The firing solenoid 4a rotates the striking member. The game balls sent from the tray toward the hitting member are hit between the rails 5a and 5b by the rotation of the hitting member and guided to the rails 5a and 5b to rise. The game ball raised between the rails 5a and 5b passes the ball return prevention piece 5c, reaches the game area 6, and falls unpredictably in the game area 6.

  Here, the rotational speed of the firing solenoid 4 a is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control substrate 160. As a result, the number of shots per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) since one shot is fired for each rotation of the firing solenoid 4a. That is, one gaming ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

  At the upper part of the game area 6, a decorative member 7 that influences the flow of the game ball is provided. At the back of the decorative member 7 in the upper part of the game area 6 and at the right end of the game area 6, drive devices for effect 33a and 33b are provided. Under the control of the lamp control board 140, the effect drive devices 33a and 33b perform game effects by the movement of the device itself. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the effect driving device 33a has an annular first movable part 330a and an actuator for supporting the upper edge thereof. When the effect driving device 33a receives a signal instructing driving of the first movable part 330a from the lamp control board 140, the effect driving device 33a is at the position on the back side of the decorative member 7 above the game area 6 (the position shown in FIG. 1). The first movable role object 330 a is lowered to the central position (the position shown in FIG. 4) of the game area 6. As shown in FIG. 5, the effect driving device 33 b has a stick-like second movable part 330 b and an actuator for supporting the lower end thereof. When the effect driving device 33b receives a signal instructing the driving of the second movable part 330b from the lamp control board 140, the second movable part 330b is moved from the position at the right end of the game area 6 (the position shown in FIG. 1). It is inclined toward the central position (the position shown in FIG. 5) of the game area 6.

  At the upper inside of the glass door 50 of the gaming machine 1, slightly inside the left corner and the right corner, a presentation driving device 33c is provided. Three effect illumination devices (lamps) 34 are accommodated in the left and right effect drive devices 33c. Under the control of the lamp control board 140, the effect driving device 33c and the effect lighting device 34 perform game effects by the movement and light emission of the device itself. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the effect drive device 33c has left and right third movable role objects 330c and an actuator for supporting their side ends. When the driving device for effect 33c receives a signal instructing driving of the third movable object 330c from the lamp control board 140, the position for covering the third movable object 330c to the illuminating device for effect 34 (the position shown in FIG. 1 And the position to be exposed (the position shown in FIG. 6). Further, the effect illumination device 34 blinks when it receives a drive signal from the lamp control board 140.

  A sound output device 32 (speaker) is provided inside the left and right effect driving devices 33 c in the upper part of the glass door 50 of the gaming machine 1. Under the control of the image control board 150, the sound output device 32 performs effects of the game by sound (output of various background music (BGM) and output of sound effects).

  Below the left area 6L in the gaming area 6, a plurality of general winning openings 12 are provided. The general winning opening 12 is provided with a general winning opening detection switch 12 a for detecting passage of gaming balls in the general winning opening 12. When the general winning opening detection switch 12a detects the passage of the game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the balls are paid out.

  Below the right area 6R in the game area 6, a first big winning opening 16 is provided. The first large winning opening 16 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The first large winning opening 16 is provided with a first large winning opening detection switch 16 a for detecting entry of gaming balls in the first large winning opening 16. When the first large winning opening detection switch 16a detects the entry of the game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

  The first large winning opening 16 is provided with a first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b, which is a special electric combination, and a first large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 16c for switching the opening and closing of the first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b. . The first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b has a rectangular plate shape substantially the same size as the first large winning opening 16. The lower edge of the first large winning opening / closing door 16 b is pivotally attached to the lower edge of the first large winning opening 16. When the first large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 16c is turned off, the first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b is erected substantially flush with the board of the game area 6, and the first large winning opening 16 is closed. When the first large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 16c is turned on, the first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b is opened forward with the lower edge of the first large winning opening 16 as a fulcrum.

  While the first big winning opening door 16b is in the closed state, the gaming ball falling from the upper side of the first big winning opening 16 passes the front of the first big winning opening 16 as it is. Therefore, while the first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b is in a closed state, the gaming ball does not enter the first large winning opening 16. On the other hand, while the first big winning opening door 16b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the first big winning hole 16 turned upward of the first big winning opening door 16b. It is guided to the side of the first large winning opening 16 by hitting the surface of the receiving tray. Therefore, while the first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b is in the open state, the gaming ball can easily enter the first large winning opening 16.

  A second big winning opening 17 is provided at the lower center of the game area 6. The second large winning opening 17 is provided with a second large winning opening detection switch 17 a for detecting the entry of the gaming ball in the second large winning opening 17. When the second large winning opening detection switch 17a detects the entry of the game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

  The second large winning opening 17 is provided with a second large winning opening opening and closing door 17b which is a special electric combination, and a second large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 17c for switching the opening and closing of the second large winning opening opening and closing door 17b. . The second large winning opening opening and closing door 17b has a rectangular plate shape substantially the same size as the second large winning opening 17. The lower edge of the second big winning opening opening and closing door 17 b is pivotally attached to the lower edge of the second big winning opening 17. When the second large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 17c is turned off, the second large winning opening opening and closing door 17b is erected substantially flush with the board of the game area 6, and the second large winning opening 17 is closed. When the second large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 17c is turned on, the second large winning opening opening and closing door 17b is opened forward with the lower edge of the second large winning opening 17 as a fulcrum.

  While the second large winning opening door 17b is closed, the game ball falling from the upper right and upper left of the second large winning opening 17 passes directly in front of the second large opening 17 Do. Therefore, while the second big winning opening opening and closing door 17b is in a closed state, the gaming ball does not enter the second big winning opening 17. On the other hand, while the second large winning opening door 17b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the second large winning opening 17 turned upward of the second large winning opening door 17b. It is guided to the side of the second large winning opening 17 by hitting the surface of the receiving tray. Therefore, while the second big winning opening opening and closing door 17b is in the open state, the gaming ball can easily enter the second big winning opening 17.

  Above the second large winning opening 17 in the lower center of the game area 6, there are a first starting opening 14 and a second starting opening 15. The first start port 14 and the second start port 15 are vertically aligned. The first starting opening 14 is provided with a first starting opening detection switch 14 a for detecting passage of gaming balls in the first starting opening 14. When the first starting opening detection switch 14a detects the passage of the gaming ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out.

  The second starting opening 15 is provided with a second starting opening detection switch 15 a for detecting passage of gaming balls in the second starting opening 15. When the second starting opening detection switch 15a detects the passage of the gaming ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out.

  The second start port 15 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 15 b. The open / close state of these movable pieces 15b is switched by the start opening / closing solenoid 15c. When the start-up opening and closing solenoid 15c is turned off, the pair of movable pieces 15b are in the closed state in which each is upright. When the start-up opening and closing solenoid 15c is turned on, the pair of movable pieces 15b is in an open state in which the movable piece 15b is inclined in the shape of an inverted V. The movable piece 15b constitutes an electric tulip (hereinafter referred to as "electric chew" as appropriate) as a normal electric part. While the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, most of the gaming balls falling toward the second start opening 15 from the upper left and right of the second start opening 15 hit the outer surface of the movable piece 15b and bounce off. For this reason, while the movable piece 15 b is in the closed state, the gaming ball hardly passes through the second starting opening 15. On the other hand, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, most of the gaming balls falling toward the second start hole 15 from the diagonally upper right of the second start hole 15 are guided to the inner surface of the movable piece 15b. The second start port 15 is reached. Therefore, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the gaming ball can easily pass through the second starting opening 15.

  A normal symbol gate 13 is provided at a position slightly above the first big winning opening 16 in the right area 6R of the game area 6. The normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting the passage of gaming balls in the normal symbol gate 13.

  Here, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot is triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol by the start winning of the first start opening 14 and the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol by the start winning of the second start opening 15. If the lottery is executed and the jackpot is won, the corresponding special symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped by the symbol according to the type of the jackpot after the variable display of the predetermined period, and this stopped symbol shows A special game corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed. In the special game, the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17 until the winning number of the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17 reaches the specified number or the opening time reaches the specified time. The opening game is a round game for one round, and this round game is repeated multiple times. The types of jackpots of the gaming machine 1 are the following seven types.

a1. The first 16R probability variation This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, 16 round games of the first round to the sixteenth round are performed. In each of the 16 round games, the number of winning prizes for the first big winning mouth 16 reaches a prescribed number (for example, 9) or the opening of the first big winning mouth 16 until 29 seconds elapses → the first big of 2 seconds The first big winning opening 16 is opened and closed in the opening and closing mode of closing the winning opening 16.

  When the jackpot is won, the gaming state related to the jackpot lottery after the end of the special game is the high probability gaming state advantageous to the player among the two states of the low probability gaming state and the high probability gaming state. In the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery probability in the low probability gaming state is set 1 (winning probability of the jackpot lottery is 2/599), setting 2 (winning probability of the jackpot lottery is 2/579), setting 3 (winning of the jackpot lottery) Probability 2/549), setting 4 (winning probability of jackpot lottery 2/529), setting 5 (winning probability of jackpot lottery 2/509), and setting 6 (winning probability of jackpot lottery 2/489) It is possible to choose among six steps. The jackpot lottery probability in the high probability gaming state is 20/599 common to all settings.

  The probability in the high probability gaming state may be increased from low probability to 10 times common to all settings. Specifically, setting 1 (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery of high probability gaming state is 20/599), setting 2 (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery of high probability gaming state is 20/579), setting 3 (high probability gaming state The winning probability of the big hit lottery of 20/549), setting 4 (the winning probability of the big hit lottery of the high probability gaming state is 20/529), setting 5 (the winning probability of the big hit lottery of the high probability gaming state is 20/509), And setting 6 (the winning probability of the jackpot lottery of the high probability gaming state may be 20/489).

  If the jackpot is won, the game state related to the ordinary electric character (movable piece 15b) after the end of the special game is in the electric power support state (the movable piece 15b is frequently opened for a long time, and the second starting opening 15 is Of the two states, that is, the state in which it becomes easy to start winning) and the non-electric chew support state (the state in which the movable piece 15b becomes difficult to be released) Of the two states of the shortening state (state in which the variation time of the special symbol becomes relatively short) and the non-time shortening state (state in which the variation time of the special symbol becomes relatively long), the time shortening state advantageous to the player is achieved. . The state relating to the ordinary electric symbol and the state relating to the special symbol are subordinate to each other, and when the state relating to the ordinary electric symbol is the electric chow support state, the state relating to the special symbol is the time shortening state. In the following description, the state in which the state related to the ordinary electric character is the electric chow support state and the state in which the special symbol relates to the time shortening state is called "time saving game state", and the state related to the ordinary electric character is not A state in which the electric chow support state and the state relating to the special symbol are the non-time shortening state is referred to as the "non-time saving game state".

  During the non-time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is 1 / 65,536, and the variation time of the normal symbol is 29 seconds, and the second starting port 15 per winning of the normal symbol lottery becomes normal. The opening time of the movable piece 15b is 0.2 seconds. In addition, during the short time game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery becomes 65535/65536, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes 3 seconds, the movable piece 15b of the second starting opening 15 per winning of the normal symbol lottery Opening time is 3.5 seconds.

  The winning probability of the normal symbol and the open time of the movable piece 15b are common to any of the setting 1 to setting 6 regardless of the setting of the jackpot lottery probability.

  If the jackpot is won, after the gaming state becomes the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state after the special game, the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again.

b1. The first 8R probability variation This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, eight round games of the first round to the eighth round are performed. In the eight round games, opening of the second large winning opening 17 until the number of winnings of the second large winning opening 17 reaches a prescribed number (for example, nine) or 29 seconds has elapsed → second large winning of two seconds The second big winning opening 17 is opened and closed in the opening and closing manner of closing the opening 17. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. The high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again.

c1. The first 8R regular hit This jackpot is one that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, eight round games of the first round to the eighth round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the second big winning opening 17 in eight round games is the same as that of the first 8R probability variation. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the low probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. The low probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state continue until the jackpot wins again or the jackpot does not win for the jackpot until the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches 100 times.

d1. The first 2R probability variation This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, two round games of the first round to the second round are performed. In two rounds of games, opening of the second large winning opening 17 until the winning number of the second large winning opening 17 reaches the specified number (for example, nine) or 0.4 seconds elapses → second of 2 seconds The second big winning opening 17 is opened and closed in the opening and closing manner of closing the big winning opening 17. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. The high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again. Here, the time required for the special game when the jackpot is won (total opening time for the big winning opening) is compared to the time required for the special game when the other jackpot is won (total opening time for the big winning opening) short. Therefore, the number of winning game balls increases in the case of winning another jackpot than in the case of winning this jackpot. The first special figure 2R probability variation is also referred to as "short hit" or "surprise hit" in the sense of a big hit that becomes a high probability gaming state through a short jackpot.

f1. The second 16R probability variation This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, 16 round games of the first round to the sixteenth round are performed. The mode of opening and closing of the first big winning opening 16 in the 16 round games is the same as that of the first 16R probability variation. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. The high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again.

g1. The second 8R probability variation This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, eight round games of the first round to the eighth round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the second big winning opening 17 in eight round games is the same as that of the first 8R probability variation. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. The high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state continue until the jackpot is won again.

i1. The second 8R regular hit This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In the special game when the jackpot is won, eight round games of the first round to the eighth round are performed. The mode of opening and closing the second big winning opening 17 in eight round games is the same as that of the first 8R probability variation. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the low probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. The low probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state continue without winning the jackpot again or winning the jackpot until the number of times of the variation of the special symbol after the special game reaches 100 times.

  In addition, the number of rounds, the number of winning rules, the opening time of the special winning opening, the number of time-saving gaming machine status, and the distribution of each big winning symbol obtained by the big hit of each special figure, the setting of the big hit lottery probability is set 1 to 6 Any one of them is common.

  In the following description, the first 16R probability variation, the first 8R probability variation, the first 2R probability variation, the second 16R probability variation, and the second 8R probability variation are collectively referred to as “certain probability variation” as appropriate. . Also, the first 8R normal hit and the second 8R normal hit are collectively referred to as “normal hit” as appropriate. Also, the first 16R probability variation per unit and the second 16R probability variation per unit are collectively referred to as “per 16R” as appropriate. A first 8R probability variation, a first 8R regular variation, a second 8R probability variation, and a second 8R regular variation are collectively referred to as “per 8R” as appropriate. The first 2R probability variation per unit is called "per 2R" as appropriate.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed to determine whether the normal symbol hits or not, triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the normal symbol by passing the gaming ball of the normal symbol gate 13, and the winning symbol is won in this normal symbol lottery. In this case, the movable piece 15b, which is a normal motorized part, is in an open state over a predetermined period. While the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the gaming ball easily passes through the second starting opening 15, so that the starting condition of the second special symbol is easily established.

  At the center of the bottom of the game area 6, an out port 11 is provided. A game ball having reached the bottom of the game area 6 without entering any of the general winning opening 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, the first large winning opening 16, and the second large winning opening 17 Is discharged through this out port 11.

  An image display device 31 is fitted between the decorative member 7 and the first starting opening 14 in the game area 6. Under the control of the image control board 150, the image display device 31 produces a game by image display.

  Describing in more detail, the gaming machine 1 performs the symbol variation production in accordance with the symbol variation from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the symbol variation effect, in the image display device 31, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z (hereinafter, these symbols 36L, 36C, 36R) , 36Z is appropriately referred to as "effect pattern 36". The left special symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are synchronized with the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 so that the first special symbol display device 20 and second symbol The same jackpot determination result is notified as the special symbol of the special symbol display device 21 indicates.

  The symbols displayed as the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are “1” symbol, “2” symbol, “3” symbol, “4” symbol, “5” symbol, “6” symbol, “ There are 7 "symbols," 8 "symbols, and" 9 "symbols. Further, the display modes of the fourth symbol 36Z include a first display mode, a second display mode, and a third display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variation display of the special symbol triggered by the start winning of the first start opening 14 or the second start opening 15 is started, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R Each is “1” symbol → “2” symbol → “3” symbol → “4” symbol → “5” symbol → “6” symbol → “7” symbol → “8” symbol → “9” symbol → “1” The one-round display of the symbol is started, and the fourth symbol 36Z starts the one-round display of the first display mode → the second display mode → the third display mode → the first display mode. When the special symbol is stopped after the variable display over the predetermined fluctuation time T, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are decided by the combination corresponding to the special symbol stopped and displayed ( Completely stop).

  If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, according to the stop of the special symbol, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z is a combination mode of jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "hit mode") The jackpot notification effect to stop at is executed. If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, according to the stop of the special symbol, left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z is a combination mode of lost (hereinafter referred to as "missing manner") The loss notification effect of stopping at is executed. The type of jackpot notified by the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z in the symbol variation effect always matches the type of jackpot notified by the special symbol.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot and the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z. In the gaming machine 1, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are either “333” or “777” and the fourth symbol 36Z is the third display mode when the win is won 16R in the big hit lottery. Stop in combination.

  If you win 8R probability variation in the jackpot lottery, left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and " In any one of 999 ", the fourth symbol 36Z is stopped in combination with the second display mode.

  If you win 8R regular hit in the big hit lottery, left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and " In any one of 999 ", the fourth symbol 36Z is stopped in combination with the first display mode.

  When the 2R probability variation is won in the big hit lottery, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "135" and the fourth symbol 36Z is stopped in the first display mode.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are stopped in an aspect other than the above combination (hereinafter referred to as the “missing aspect” as appropriate).

  Here, the fourth symbol 36Z has a display size extremely smaller than the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R. Therefore, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are determined (completely stopped) with the same symbol combination other than "777" and "333", either 8R probability variation hit or 8R normal hit is won either I do not know what it is. When the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are determined (completely stopped) with "777" or "333", it is easily understood that the player has won the 16R probability variation at the determined time.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (a), when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are stopped in the hit mode to play a special game, the special game is produced according to the special game. Do. In the special game presentation, an opening presentation relating to the opening of the special game, a round game presentation relating to the round game, and an ending presentation relating to the ending of the special game are performed.

As shown in FIG. 7B, at the lower part of the center in the image display device 31, the image 37 (0) _{0 of the} variation is displayed. If the first is pending variation of the special symbols, on the left side of the image of the variation in the image display device 31 37 (0), the image 37 of the _first hold the first special symbol (variation order is first hold) (1), second hold image ₃₇ 1 (2) of the (variation order is second hold), the third hold image ₃₇ 1 (3) of the (variation order is third hold), and a fourth hold (variation A maximum of four images of the image 37 ₁ (4) of the 4th hold) are displayed.

In addition, when there is a suspension of the change of the second special symbol, the image of the first suspension (the transition order is the first suspension) in the second special symbol on the right of the image 37 (0) of the variation in the image display device 31 37 ₂ (1), second hold image ₃₇ 2 (2) of the (variation order is second hold), the third hold image ₃₇ 2 (3) of the (variation order is third hold), and a fourth hold A maximum of 4 images of the image 37 ₂ (4) (the fourth change order is the hold) are displayed. Here, in FIG. 7B, only the images 37 (0), 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), and 37 ₁ (3) are shown for the sake of simplicity.

When the number of pending display of the first special symbol pending display 23 increases, the images 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) according to the pending number after the increase Appear. When the number of pending display of the second special symbol pending display 24 increases, the images 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) according to the pending number after the increase Appear.

During the display of the first special symbol hold display 23 and the number of pending display of the image 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4), one time of the special symbol Each time a change is completed, the image 37 (0) disappear in the variation, the image 37 of the first hold ₍₁₎ is moved to the position of the variation image 37 (0) of the variation, the second pending subsequent image 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), or 37 ₁ (4) move to the position to the right of each other.

While the display of the second special symbol hold display 24 and the corresponding displayed image 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4), one time of the special symbol Each time a change is completed, the image 37 (0) disappear in the variation, the first hold image 37 2 ₍₁₎ is moved to the position of the variation image 37 (0) of the variation, the second pending subsequent image 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ (3), or 37 ₂ (4) move to the position to the left of each other.

In the following description, images 37 (0), 37 ₁ (1), 37 ₁ (2), 37 ₁ (3), 37 ₁ (4), 37 ₂ (1), 37 ₂ (2), 37 ₂ ( 3) and 37 ₂ (4) are appropriately referred to as “pending display image 37”.

  FIG. 9 is a view showing the mode of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 operates in five modes, a normal mode, a live mode, a training mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode. Of the five modes, the normal mode, the live mode, and the training mode are modes related to the progress of the game. The normal mode, the live mode, and the special training mode can shift after the gaming machine 1 is in the customer waiting state through the initialization processing when the normal activation operation or the RAM clear activation operation is performed. The setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are setting modes relating to settings relating to a jackpot lottery. The setting change mode can shift only when the first special activation operation is performed. The setting confirmation mode can shift only when the second special activation operation is performed. The procedure of each activation operation will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the normal mode, the gaming machine 1 is in the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state, in the live mode it is in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state, and in the special training mode, the low probability gaming state Become state and time saving game state.

  More specifically, when the normal activation operation or the RAM clear activation operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 enters the normal mode after the initialization processing. The player starts playing in the normal mode. In the normal mode, stage effects of three stages, a marine stage, a savanna stage, and a cosmo stage, are performed in addition to the symbol variation production. In the stage effect of the savanna stage in the normal mode, an image showing the state of the sea is displayed as a background image of the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, and the right pattern 36R in the symbol variation effect. In the stage effect of the savanna stage in the normal mode, an image showing the state of the savanna is displayed as a background image of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the symbol variation effect. In the stage effect of the Cosmo stage in the normal mode, an image showing the appearance of space is displayed as a background image of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the symbol variation effect. As shown in FIG. 10A, in the normal mode, there is a stage change at each predetermined timing (for example, immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display) in the fluctuation display with one or more fluctuation displays interposed therebetween, In this stage change, the type of stage effect is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when the player wins a probability change, the effect after the end of the special game becomes the effect of the live mode. In the live mode effect, a live recorded video is displayed as a background image of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the symbol variation effect. The live mode presentation continues until the jackpot wins again. Next, if the jackpot won is a probability change hit, the effect after the end of the special game becomes the effect of the live mode again. If the next winning jackpot is a normal hit, the effect after the end of the special game is the effect of the special training mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), when the normal winning is won, the effect after the end of the special game becomes the effect of the special training mode. In the special training mode when winning in a normal hit, an animation image showing a character training for a live is displayed as a background image of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in symbol variation production . The number of remaining training modes is displayed in the lower right corner of the background image. The number of remaining times is counted down as 100 → 99 → 98... → 1 each time the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are determined (completely stopped) in the lost mode. When the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped in the lost mode in the symbol variation effect of the variation in which the remaining number has become 1, an image of "special training mode end" appears. The effect that the image of the "special training mode end" appears is the special training mode end finalization effect that notifies that the end of the time saving game state has been decided. The effect after the special training mode end fixed effect is the effect of the normal mode.

  In the gaming machine 1, in the symbol variation production, reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production, all rotation reach production, re-lottery production, challenge production, surprise operation based on the lottery result of the big hit lottery and the operation of the production button 35. An effect, a shortening variation effect, and one or more effects of a plurality of types of effects including a specific advance notice effect are selected, and the selected one or more effects are displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the drive for effect It is performed by the devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the effect illumination device 34. In addition, in the special game effect, the gaming machine 1 selects and selects one or more effects among a plurality of types of effects including rank-up effects based on the lottery result of the big hit lottery and the operation of the effect button 35 The image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, and 33c, and the effect illumination device 34 execute one or more effects. The outline of each effect executed as the symbol variation effect or the special game effect is as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), reach effects may be executed as part of the symbol change effects. The reach effect may be executed after a normal change (a left symbol 36L, a middle symbol 36C, and a right symbol 36R are randomly displayed in a circle) over a predetermined time within the variation time T of the special symbol. It is a period of time t _{RCA to} t _RCB . In reach effect, at time t _RCA within the fluctuation time T, one of the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R (the left symbol 36L in the example of FIGS. 12A and 12B) is temporarily stopped. At the subsequent time t _RCB , the other symbol of the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R (the right symbol 36R in the example of FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b)) is temporarily stopped with the same kind of symbol Stop.

  In reach effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R reach the reach mode (the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are the same symbol while the middle symbol 36C fluctuates) by temporary stop of the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R. It becomes the aspect temporarily stopped by the combination). After temporary stop in the reach mode of the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, and the right pattern 36R in the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 12 (a), the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, and the right pattern 36R hit If there is a case where you proceed to the effect of stopping temporarily (hereinafter referred to as “hit reach effect” as appropriate, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), the left symbol 36 L, the middle symbol 36 C, and the right symbol 36 R There are also cases where it proceeds to the effect to stop (hereinafter, referred to as "a lost reach effect" as appropriate). Here, the lost reach effect of the present embodiment is an effect of progressing to a temporary stop in the lost mode through the temporary stop in the reach mode of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R, and the left pattern 36L, It is not an effect until the middle symbol 36C and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped in the reach mode and then determined (completely stopped) in the lost mode.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (c), there may be a case where a notice effect of out-of-focus is executed as part of the symbol variation effect. Out of notice notice effect is that left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and fourth symbol 36Z are lost before left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R and fourth symbol 36Z stop in the lost mode. It is an effect that gives notice of stopping in a mode. In the advance notice effect for out-of-plane, characters of "ha-zure" appear under the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R.

  As shown to Fig.13 (a), SP reach production may be performed as a part of symbol fluctuation production. The SP reach effect may be executed after the loss reach effect is executed in the symbol change (hereinafter referred to as “reach change” as appropriate) with the establishment of the reach. In the symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as “normal variation” as appropriate) which is stopped without passing the establishment of the reach only by the normal variation, the SP reach effect is not executed. SP reach production is a development production that develops from reach production. The SP reach effect is a resurrection effect indicating that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are restored from the state likely to be determined in the lost mode in normal fluctuation. Before the start of the SP reach effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped in the lost mode. Thereafter, the middle symbol 36C of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R starts high-speed rotation, and the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R separate from the left corner and the right corner of the screen. In the SP reach effect, animation character images by a plurality of characters are displayed. The reliability of the jackpot when developing from reach production to SP reach production is higher than when not developing to SP reach production.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, SPSP reach effect may be executed as part of the symbol change effect. The SPSP reach effect may be executed after the loss reach effect in the reach change. In normal fluctuation, SPSP reach production is not performed. SPSP reach production is a development production that develops from SP reach production. The SPSP reach effect is a revival effect indicating that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are recovered from the state likely to be determined in the lost mode in the SP reach effect. In the SP reach effect before the SPSP reach effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped in the lost mode. Thereafter, the middle symbol 36C of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R starts high-speed rotation, and the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R separate from the left corner and the right corner of the screen. In SPSP reach production, a recorded video of singing by all characters is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot when developing from SP reach production to SPSP reach production is higher than that without SPSP reach production.

  As shown in FIG. 13C, there may be a case where an SP-specific advance notice effect is performed in addition to the SP reach effect. In the SP-specific advance notice effect, a stand on which SP characters are written and an image of the mini character MC1 dancing on the stand appear in the lower right corner of the screen. The mini character MC1 is a character that plays a role in suggesting the possibility of developing into SP reach effect. Here, since the SP reach effect is an effect that progresses from a temporary stop in the lost mode of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in normal fluctuation, the appearance of the mini character MC1 is the left symbol in normal fluctuation It is nothing but a notice that 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R will temporarily stop in the lost mode.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (d), SPSP specific advance notice effects may be executed in combination with SPSP reach effects. In the SPSP specific advance notice effect, a stand on which the characters SPSP are written and an image of the mini character MC2 dancing on the stand appear in the lower right corner of the screen. The mini character MC2 is a character that plays the role of suggesting the possibility of developing into SPSP reach effect. Here, since the SPSP reach effect is an effect that progresses from the temporary stop in the lost mode of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the SP reach effect, the appearance of the mini character MC2 is in the SP reach effect. It is nothing but a notice that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C and the right symbol 36R will temporarily stop in the lost mode.

  As shown in FIG. 14, there may be a case where full rotation reach effect is executed as part of the symbol change effect. The all-rotation reach effect is an effect in which the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R fluctuate while being aligned in the same symbol combination. It is usually at the end of fluctuation or reach fluctuation that full turn reach production may be performed. The full turn reach presentation may be performed in normal fluctuation and reach fluctuation, or may be performed only in reach fluctuation. The all rotation reach effect is one of the jackpot finalization effects (effects to notify that before the effect pattern 36 is determined in the hitting mode).

  As shown in FIG. 15 (a), FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (c), there may be a case where the re-lottery effect is executed as a part of the symbol variation effect. The re-lottery effect may be executed when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are fixed (completely stopped) in the stopping mode per 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, or 8R normal variation It is the end of the reach change. In the normal fluctuation, the re-lottery effect is not executed.

  Before the start of the re-lottery effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and "999". Temporarily stop at any of In the re-lottery effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R start re-variation after a temporary stop over a short time. This re-variation presentation is a promotion presentation that directs whether to promote from 8R probability variation or 8R regular to 16R probability variation.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (a), when the player wins a 16R probability variation, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R undergo re-variation, and then the left symbol 36L, at the time of stopping the special symbol. Middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop mode (per left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R is "333" or "777", fourth symbol 36Z is the third display aspect) Confirm with). The effect determined in the stop mode per 16R probability variation is a promotion determined effect indicating that the 8R probability variation or 8R normal to 16R probability variation has been promoted.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (b), when winning 8R probability variation, left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R are subjected to re-variation, and then left symbol 36L, at the stop of the special symbol. The middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are fixed in the stop mode per 8R probability variation.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (c), when winning 8R regular hit, left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R are subjected to re-variation, and then left symbol 36L, at the stop of the special symbol. The middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are fixed in the stop mode of the 8R normal hit.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), FIG. 16 (b) and FIG. 16 (c), a serif operation effect may be executed as part of the symbol change effect. The speech operation effect may be executed in the early stage of the fluctuation or reach fluctuation (before reaching the reach) to the end. In the dialogue effect, a silhouette image and a balloon frame that repeat one round display such as the silhouette of character A → the silhouette of character B → the silhouette of character C → the silhouette of character D → the silhouette of character A appear. Slightly after the appearance of the silhouette image and the balloon frame, an operation promoting effect (an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the operation acceptance effective period, and an image of "Press!" Appears to urge the operation of the effect button 35 Production) is performed.

  When the effect button 35 is pressed within the operation acceptance effective period indicated by the indicator image, the round-trip display of the silhouette is stopped, the characters A, B, C, or D appear, and the speech is displayed in the balloon frame. There are three types of words that appear in the balloon: “...”, “a chance”, and “a fiery fever”. The confidence of the jackpot of the three types of dialogue directing "It's intense heat", "An opportunity", and "..." is "Extreme heat"> "An opportunity"> "..." In order of In the speech operation effect, when "..." appears, the fluctuation is fixed in a lost manner without developing. The serif notice effect of “...” Is one of the loss notice effects for giving notice that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R stop in the lost mode.

  As shown in FIG. 16D, there may be a case where a serif operation specific advance notice effect is performed in addition to the serif operation effect. The speech operation specific advance notice effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of execution of the speech operation effect. In the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect, behind the left pattern 36L, the middle pattern 36C, and the right pattern 36R, the dialog as the operation result of the dialogue operation effect ("in the example of Fig. 16 (d)" It's intense heat ") is translucent The serif de jab image shown by appears.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b), a challenge effect may be executed as part of the symbol change effect. The challenge effect is executed after the loss reach effect in the reach change. If the 2R probability variation (short hit) is won, the challenge effect is a challenge success effect, and if it is a loss, the challenge effect is a challenge failure effect.

  Before the start of the challenge effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are temporarily stopped in the lost mode. After temporary stop of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R, the screen turns dark (black out), and the second movable part 330b tilts after the dark rotation for a predetermined period. After that, the characters of "Mazeo Challenge", the image of the castle, and the image of the guardian protecting the castle appear, and the display of the image in which the character advances in the labyrinth starts. After the display of the image for a predetermined period, an operation promotion effect that urges the operation of the effect button 35 (an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the operation acceptance valid period, and an effect to make the image "Press!" Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, when the 2R probability variation (short hit) is won, the effect button 35 is pressed within the operation reception valid period indicated by the indicator image, or the effect button 35 is not operated. When the operation acceptance effective period has passed, a challenge rebirth effect is performed. In the challenge rebirth effect, the first movable combination 330a descends, a challenge notification effect image (rose image) appears in the ring of the first movable combination 330a in the display screen of the image display device 31, and the sound is output. A short hit notification effect sound (sound of “cueen”) is output from the device 32. After this effect, at the time of the stop of the special symbol, the image of my character and "challenge success!" Appears, and the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z stop the 2R probability variation The determination is made in the mode (left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, right symbol 36R is "135").

  As shown in FIG. 17B, when there is a loss, regardless of the operation of the effect button 35, the drop of the first movable role 330a, the display of the short hit notification effect image, and the short hit notification effect sound There is no output. In this case, when the special symbol is stopped, an image of "failure" appears, and the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined in the lost mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (b), battle effects may be executed as part of the symbol change effects. The battle effect is executed after the loss reach effect in the reach change. If the player wins 16R probability, 8R probability, or 8R regular hit, the battle effect is a battle success effect, and if it is a loss, a battle failure effect is produced.

  Before the start of the battle effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R temporarily stop in the lost mode. In the battle effect, an image of “my character on the left side”, another character on the other side in the battle on the right side, and “VS” appears. After that, an image of "Jan" and an image of "Ken" appear in order, and an image showing the result of the first battle is displayed. The results of the battle include "Aiko", "Win" and "Loss". When the result of the battle is "Aiko", an image of "Jan" and an image of "Ken" appear sequentially, and an image showing the result of the second battle is displayed. The display of “Aiko” → “Jan” → “Ken” → the battle result is repeated until the result is “win” or “los”.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (a), in the case of winning any of 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, and 8R regular variation, the result of "winning" is obtained through one or more times of "Aiko". It is displayed, and the image of my character and the image of "Win" appear. The effect that the image of "my character" and "Win" appear is a battle success notification effect for notifying that the battle is successful. When the image of my character and "Win" appears, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z hit 16R, 8R, 8R or 8R at the time of stopping special symbols. Determined in the stop mode of (complete stop).

  As shown in FIG. 18B, in the case of a loss, the result of "losing" is displayed after one or more times of "Aiko", and the image of the character of the battle opponent and the image of "Lose" are displayed. Appear. The effect that the character of the other party of the battle and the image of “Lose” appear is a battle failure notification effect for notifying that the battle has failed. When the battle character and the image of "Lose" appear, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are decided (completely stopped) in the lost mode when the special symbol is stopped. .

  As shown in FIG. 19 (a), a shortening variation effect may be executed as part of a symbol variation effect. Here, the shortening fluctuation is a fluctuation display which is stopped only after the establishment of the reach only by the normal fluctuation, and is a fluctuation display in which the fluctuation time is shorter than that of the normal fluctuation. The shortening variation occurs with a predetermined probability when the number of reservations is a predetermined number (for example, two) or more. In the shortening fluctuation presentation, a shortening fluctuation presentation sound (a sound of "Gushan") is output from the voice output device 32 in accordance with the fluctuation stop of the fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), there may be a case where a shortened fluctuation advance notice effect is performed in addition to the shortened fluctuation effect. The shortening change advance notice effect is an effect of giving notice that the fluctuation of the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 will be shortening fluctuation before the symbols of the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 are stopped and displayed. In the shortened fluctuation advance notice effect, an image of cymbal, which is a generation source of a sound of "Gashan", appears on the image 37 (0) of the fluctuation under the screen.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a), a surprise operation effect may be executed as part of the symbol change effect. The surprise operation effect may be executed after the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z temporarily stop in the lost mode during reach variation, or the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, It may be executed before the right symbol 36R and the fourth symbol 36Z are temporarily stopped in the lost mode. Also, the surprise operation rendition may be performed during normal fluctuation or during shortening fluctuation. The surprise operation effect is one of the relief effects for notifying that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot.

  In the surprise operation effect, the action button 35 is in the projecting state, and the operation promoting effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 35 (an image imitating the effect button 35 in the projecting state, an indicator image showing the operation acceptance effective period, and "press!" The effect of making the image appear is performed. When the effect button 35 is pressed within the operation acceptance effective period indicated by the indicator image, or when the operation acceptance effective period elapses without the operation of the effect button 35, the first movable combination 330a descends, and the display of the image display device 31 A big hit notification effect image (an image of an annular effect forming a circle concentric with the ring of the first moveable character 330a) appears in the ring of the first movable character 330a in the screen, and the big hit notification sound from the audio output device 32 (The sound of "Quicui" is output).

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), there are cases where rank-up effects are executed as part of the special game effects during the special game. In the rank-up effect, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are the stop modes of "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", or "999". In the special game to be performed triggered by the decision, at the beginning of the execution of the special game, 8R certain per variation or 8R regular per win without clearly indicating which was won, which jackpot was won in the middle of the special game It is an effect that clearly indicates The rank-up effect is executed during a period from time t _{SKK to} time t _RDE after the start time t _S4R of the fourth round of the special game. In the rank-up effect, the player is urged to continuously hit the effect button 35, and when the number of consecutive hits on the effect button 35 reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), it is informed whether 8R probability variation is hit.

More specifically, in the rank-up effect, at time t _SKK , an image of “charge the gauge and get a definite change” appears at the center of the screen. At time t _RDS , a horizontally-long rectangular gauge image, an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing the progress of the operation reception effective period of the effect button 35, and an operation guidance image (image of “continuous hit!”) Appear. In the gauge image, the left end of the progress range in the gauge image is MIN, the right end of the progress range of the gauge image is MAX, and the probability per probability variation is indicated by the amount of progress between MIN and MAX.

In the rank-up effect, when the effect button 35 is continuously hit within the operation reception effective period indicated by the indicator image, the amount of progress in the gauge image advances to the right in accordance with the continuous hit. Operation or number of times of repeated pressing of the performance button 35 in the accepted validity period up to 30 times, and the number of the barrage is the end time t _RDE remains operation accepting the validity period does not reach to 30 times, to rank up at the end time t _RDE You will be notified if it succeeded or failed.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in the production of rank-up success, the amount of progress of the gauge reaches “MAX”, and images of “success” and “concerning positive change” are displayed. In the special game, when the effect of rank-up success is executed, the effect of the live mode (FIG. 11A) is performed after the end of the special game.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, in the stage of rank-up failure, the amount of progress of the gauge stops before “MAX”, and an image of “failure” is displayed. In the special game, when the effect of rank up failure is executed, the special training mode effect (FIG. 11B) is performed after the end of the special game.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (b), 10 (c), and 10 (d), stage change advance presentation effects may be executed before changing the stage in the normal mode variation display. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), in the stage change notice presentation for giving notice of the stage change to the savanna stage, a mini character (an elephant mini character in the example of FIG. 10 (b)) associated with the savanna stage appears. As shown in FIG. 10 (c), in the stage change notice presentation for giving notice of the stage change to the Cosmo stage, a mini character (a mini character of a rocket in the example of FIG. 10 (c)) associated with the Cosmo stage appears. As shown in FIG. 10 (d), in the stage change notice effect for giving notice of the stage change to the marine stage, a mini character (a mini character of a dolphin in the example of FIG. 10 (d)) appears associated with the marine stage. The stage change notice effect may be performed immediately before the stop of the variation display of the special symbol as shown in FIG. 10 (a) or just after the stop of the variation display of the special symbol as shown in FIG. 10 (b) You may carry out, and as shown in FIG.10 (b), you may carry out immediately after the start of the fluctuation display of a special symbol.

  In addition, the game machine 1 may execute the prefetch effect effect when the change of the special symbol is suspended due to the start winning of the first start opening 14 or the second start opening 15. The preread effect effect is an effect that indicates the possibility that there is a big hit in the hold due to the appearance of the effect image.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the suspension of the variation of the special symbol occurs due to the start winning, and in the case of the suspension (in the example of FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b) When a look-ahead effect effect is executed in which the final fluctuation is the first variation of the first special symbol generated and the corresponding fluctuation is executed, each of the normal fluctuation or the shortening fluctuation from the starting winning combination to the fluctuation before the final fluctuation Immediately after the start, at time t _EF (in the example of FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), time t _EF (3) immediately after the start of the third preceding fluctuation of the final fluctuation, the second preceding fluctuation of the final fluctuation) At time t _EF (2) immediately after the start, and at time t _EF (1) immediately after the start of the variation immediately before the final variation, an effect image (image simulating lightning) appears behind the rendering pattern 36, The preread effect sound is output from the voice output device 32. In the pre-reading effect production, the reliability of the jackpot of the final variation increases in the order of blue effect <green effect <red effect. In the normal fluctuation and the shortening fluctuation, the modes of the effect image and the preread effect sound are different. In normal fluctuation, one lightning appears behind the middle pattern 36C, and a sound of "Pika" is output. In the shortening variation, two lightnings appear behind the left pattern 36L and the right pattern 36R, and a sound of "Pickerpika" is output.

  Here, since the prefetch effect effect is an effect that suggests the possibility that the final change will be a big hit, the appearance of the lightning immediately after the start of the change display in the normal change or the shortening change before the final change is the change that is lost It is nothing but a notice of stopping display with the symbol of. In addition, while the pre-read effect sound in the normal change is "Pikak", the pre-read effect sound in the normal change is "Pica Pika", so the output of the sound "Pika Pika" immediately after the start of the change display in the shortening change is It is nothing less than a warning that the fluctuation will be a shortening fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the gaming machine 1, the main control board 110, effect control board 120, payout control board 130, power supply board 170, game information output terminal board 30, power plug 171, power switch 172, etc. is there. The main control board 110 is covered by a removable cover 119. FIG. 23 is an assembly view showing the configuration of the cover 119 of the main control board 110 and the inside thereof. Inside the cover 119, there are a RAM clear switch 174, a setting key 177, and a monitor 178.

  The RAM clear switch 174 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state by pushing it back with a finger. The setting key 177 is switched between the OFF state and the ON state by inserting the key 176 into the keyhole of the setting key 177 and turning it. The monitor 178 is composed of four-digit 8-segment LEDs (seven LEDs forming a number and one LED forming a decimal point). A hole 173 is bored in the lower left corner of the cover 119. Even when the cover 119 is attached to the main control board 110, the RAM clear switch 174 at the back of the hole 173 can be pressed to turn it on. When the cover 119 is attached to the main control board 110, although the setting key 177 can not be operated, the monitor 178 is visible.

  When the activation operation is performed on the gaming machine 1, power is supplied from the power supply substrate 170 to the main control substrate 110, the effect control substrate 120, and the payout control substrate 130, and the substrates 110, 120, and 130 are activated. The main control board 110, the effect control board 120, and the payout control board 130 can perform independent operations triggered by power on.

  Here, the activation operation of the gaming machine 1 includes a normal activation operation, a RAM clear activation operation, a first special activation operation, and a second special activation operation. As shown in FIG. 24, in the normal start-up operation, the setting key 177 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the normal start-up operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 restores the data in the use area of the main RAM 110c in the initialization process, and performs the process of the normal mode after the end of the initialization process.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the RAM clear activation operation, the setting key 177 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned on, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the RAM clear activation operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 clears the use area of the main RAM 110c in the initialization processing, and performs the processing of the normal mode after the completion of the initialization processing.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, in the first special activation operation, the setting key 177 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned on, and the power switch 172 is turned on. The first special start-up operation has to be performed with the glass door 50 open. When the first special activation operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 performs a process of setting change mode in the initialization process. In the setting change mode, the monitor 178 of the main control board 110 displays a number indicating the setting of the current jackpot lottery probability (“0001” indicating setting 1 in the example of FIG. 26A). In the setting change mode, it is possible to change the setting of the jackpot lottery probability.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, when it is desired to change the setting of the jackpot lottery probability, the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed. Every time the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed once, the number of monitors 178 changes cyclically as "0002"-> "0003"-> "0004"-> "0005"-> "0006"-> "0001". When it is desired to determine the setting of the jackpot lottery probability, the setting key 177 is returned to the OFF state, and the power switch 172 is turned OFF. When the power switch 172 is turned off, the setting corresponding to the number of monitors 178 at that time (setting 2 corresponding to "0002" in the example of FIG. 26B) is decided as a new setting, and this setting is set Information is written to the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and after the writing, processing related to power-off is performed. Thereafter, when the normal boot operation (FIG. 24) is performed again, the setting information of the main RAM 110c is restored in the initialization process. After being in the customer waiting state after the initialization process, the jackpot lottery is performed under the jackpot lottery probability indicated by the setting information.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in the second special startup operation, the setting key 177 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, and the power switch 172 is turned on. The second special start-up operation is to be performed with the glass door 50 open. When the second special activation operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 performs the process of the setting confirmation mode in the initialization process. In the setting confirmation mode, the monitor 178 of the main control board 110 displays a number indicating the setting of the current jackpot lottery probability (in the example of FIG. 27, "0002" indicating setting 2).

  In FIG. 3, the main control board 110 controls the basic operation of the gaming machine 1. The main control board 110 is provided with a one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port (not shown), and an output port (not shown). The one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 is composed of a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c.

  The input control port of the main control board 110 includes a payout control board 130, a general winning opening detection switch 12a, a gate detection switch 13a, a first start opening detection switch 14a, a second start opening detection switch 15a, and a first large winning opening detection switch. A second large winning opening detection switch 17a, a door opening switch 18a, a magnetic detection sensor 18b, and a vibration detection sensor 18c are connected.

  At the output port of the main control board 110, a payout control board 130, a start opening opening / closing solenoid 15c, a first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c, a second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special A symbol display device 21, an ordinary symbol display device 22, a first special symbol hold indicator 23, a second special symbol hold indicator 24, an ordinary symbol hold indicator 25, and a game information output terminal board 30 are connected. The game information output terminal board 30 is for outputting an external output signal generated in the main control board 110 to a hall computer or the like of the game arcade. The game information output terminal board 30 is provided with a connector for connecting to a hall computer or the like of the game arcade.

  The main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from the detection switches and the timer. Further, the main CPU 110a directly controls the display devices 20 to 22 and the displays 23 to 25 or transmits a command to another substrate according to the result of the arithmetic processing. When the start operation is performed, the main CPU 110a executes an initialization process, and after the initialization process is finished and a game is possible, the jackpot random number value, the special symbol random number value, the reach determination random number value, While updating various random number values including random number values for special figure variation, normal symbol random number values, etc. within each random number range, the progression of the game such as the variation of the special symbol, the variation of the normal symbol, and the special game is controlled.

  Data such as a game control program is stored in the main ROM 110 b of the main control board 110. In the main ROM 110b, a jackpot determination table for the special symbol display devices 20 and 21, a collision determination table for the normal symbol display device 22, a symbol determination table, a variation pattern determination table, a prior determination table, a special game control table, and a special winning opening Various tables such as an open / close control table and a special game end setting table are stored. Details of these tables will be described later.

  The main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the main CPU 110a. The main RAM 110c has a special symbol hold storage area, a special figure special power processing data storage area, a stop symbol data storage area, a normal symbol hold storage area, a common pattern general processing data storage area, a normal symbol data storage area, the number of rounds (R ) Storage area, winning a prize opening ball number (C) storage area, high probability gaming flag storage area, short time gaming flag storage area, gaming state buffer, the first special symbol hold number counter, the second special symbol hold number counter, ordinary Number of symbol holding number counter, high probability game number (X) counter, time saving number (J) counter, special symbol time counter, special gaming timer counter, normal symbol time counter, auxiliary gaming timer counter, various transmission data storage areas for effects etc A storage area is provided. Here, at the time of power interruption, the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c is added with a checksum and backed up by the backup power supply, and at the time of power restoration, the data backed up by the backup power supply is recovered through a data check by the checksum. It is supposed to get.

  The power supply substrate 170 supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1 and supplies a disconnection detection signal indicating whether or not the power supply voltage has become equal to or less than a predetermined value to the main control substrate 110 and the effect control substrate 120. The power supply substrate 170 has a backup power supply made of a capacitor. The power supply substrate 170 sets the disconnection detection signal to the high level while the power supply voltage exceeds the predetermined value, and sets the disconnection detection signal to the low level when the power supply voltage becomes lower than the predetermined value.

  The effect control board 120 controls various effects. The effect control board 120 receives a command generated by the main control board 110, and based on the received command, displays an image executed on the image display device 31, a sound output executed on the sound output device 32, and a drive for effect It controls the operations performed in the devices 33a, 33b, 33c, or the blinking performed in the effect lighting device 34. More specifically, the effect control board 120 is communicably connected to the main control board 110 in one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. The effect control board 120 includes a sub CPU 120 a, a sub ROM 120 b, a sub RAM 120 c, and an RTC 120 d. The RTC 120 d outputs a time signal indicating the current date and time to the sub CPU 120 a. The RTC 120 d operates with the supplied power when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, and operates with the power of a backup power supply mounted on the power supply substrate 170 when the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

  The sub CPU 120a reads out the program stored in the sub ROM 120b based on the command transmitted from the main control board 110 and the input signal from the timer, performs arithmetic processing, and lights the corresponding command based on the processing. It is transmitted to the control board 140 and the image control board 150. The sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process when the start operation is performed, and after the initialization process is finished and becomes a state where the game is possible, the effect random number 1 to 21 (a random number range of 0 to 99 each) The effect according to the progress of the game is controlled while updating various random number values including the 21 types of random number values) and the like within each random number range. Here, as for the effect random number values 1 to 21, the same random value is not obtained at the same time.

  The sub ROM 120 b of the effect control board 120 stores data such as an effect control program. In the sub ROM 120b, various tables such as a variation presentation pattern determination table are stored. The details of these tables will be described later. The sub RAM 120c of the effect control board 120 functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 120a. The sub RAM 120c is provided with various storage areas such as a presentation information storage area, a presentation symbol storage area, a symbol variation presentation pattern storage area, a gaming state storage area, and a presentation pattern storage area.

  FIG. 28 is a view showing main commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. The command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 is composed of a total of 2 bytes of 1 byte of MODE data indicating the type of command and 1 byte of DATA data indicating the content of the command.

  The "symbol designation command" such as "loss symbol designation command", "first definite variation per symbol designation command", "first definite variation per development symbol designation command" is the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display This is a command for designating a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the device 21.

  "The first special symbol hold number specification command" such as "the first special symbol hold number 0 specification command", "the first special symbol hold number 1 specification command" is a command that indicates the hold number of the variation of the first special symbol is there. The "second special symbol hold number specification command" such as "second special symbol hold number 0 specification command" and "second special symbol hold number 1 specification command" is a command that indicates the hold number of variation of the second special symbol is there. In the following description, the "first special symbol hold number designation command" and the "second special symbol hold number designation command" are collectively referred to as a "special symbol hold number designation command" as appropriate.

  The "variable stop command" is a command indicating that the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The “power on designation command” is a command indicating that the main control board 110 is powered on. The "RAM clear designation command" is a command indicating that the information in the main RAM 110c has been cleared. The “power recovery 1 specification command”, “power recovery 2 specification command”, “power recovery 3 specification command”, and “power recovery 4 specification command” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “power recovery specification command” as appropriate) , Is a command indicating that the main control board 110 is powered on again. The “power recovery 1 specified command” indicates that the gaming state at the time of power recovery is “the low probability gaming state and the non-short time gaming state”. The “power recovery 2 designation command” indicates that the gaming state at the time of power recovery is “the low probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state”. The “power recovery 3 specified command” indicates that the gaming state at the time of power recovery is “high probability gaming state and non-short time gaming state”. The “power recovery 4 specified command” indicates that the gaming state at the time of power recovery is “high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state”.

  The “wait for customer designation command” is a command indicating that the customer wait state is entered.

  The “1st special symbol variation start command” such as “1st special symbol variation start 1 variation start command” and “1st special symbol variation start 2 variation start command” is the first in the first special symbol display device 20 1) It is a command that indicates that the change of special symbol is started. The "second special symbol variation start command" such as "second special symbol variation start 11 variation start command" and "second special symbol variation start 12 variation start command" is the second special symbol display device 21 (2) It is a command indicating that the change of the special symbol is started. In the following description, the "first special symbol variation start command" and the "second special symbol variation start command" are collectively referred to as "variation start command" as appropriate.

  The "first special symbol start prize designation command" such as "first special symbol start prize 1 designation command", "first special symbol start prize 2 designation command", etc. 1) It is a command indicating a winning of the game ball to the starting opening 14). The "second special symbol start prize designation command" such as "second special symbol start prize 11 designation command", "second special symbol start prize 12 designation command", etc. 2) It is a command showing a winning of the game ball to the starting opening 15. In the following description, the "first special symbol start winning designation command" and the "second special symbol start winning designation command" are collectively referred to as a "start winning designation command" as appropriate.

  The "round start command" such as "long open first round start command", "long long open second round start command", and "short open first round start command", each round of the special game It is a command indicating that it starts. The “opening designation command” such as “a opening designation command for a certain variable length”, a “opening designation command for a normal long hit”, and the like is a special game start command indicating that a special game has been started. The “ending designation command” is a special game end command indicating that the special game is ended.

  The “playing state 1 specification command”, the “playing state 2 specification command”, the “playing state 3 specification command” and the “playing state 4 specification command” are commands indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1. The “playing state 1 designation command” indicates that the low probability playing state and the non-time-short playing state are being made. The “playing state 2 designated command” indicates that the high probability playing state and the non-time-short playing state are selected. The “playing state 3 designation command” indicates that the low probability playing state and the time saving game state are selected. The “playing state 4 designated command” indicates that it is a high probability playing state and a time saving playing state.

  The "full size error command" is a command indicating that a full size error has occurred. The dish filling error occurs when the delivery control board 130 outputs a command indicating that the tray 40 is full. The “counter case error command” is a command indicating that a counter case error has occurred. A counter case error occurs when a ball jam between the tray 40 and the dispensing mechanism is detected. The “counting switch disconnection error command” is a command indicating that a counting switch disconnection error has occurred. The counting switch disconnection error occurs when it is detected that the wiring between the dispensing control board 130 and the dispensing device relay terminal board or the wiring between the dispensing device relay terminal board and the dispensing mechanism section is disconnected.

  The "ballless error command" is a command indicating that a ballless error has occurred. The no ball error occurs when the payout control board 130 outputs a command indicating that the payout device has no gaming ball. The “overdelivery error command” is a command indicating that an overdelivery error command has occurred. The overdelivery error occurs when it is detected that overdelivery is being performed (the dispensing device has made more than the required number of dispensing). The “dispense command error command” is a command indicating that a payout command error has occurred. The payout command error occurs when it is detected that there is an abnormality in the number-of-payouts designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the payout control board 130.

  The “door open error command” is a command indicating that a door open error has occurred. The door opening error occurs when the door opening switch 18 a detects the opening of the glass door 50. The “switch non-connection error command” is a command indicating that a switch non-connection error has occurred. Switch non-connection error, general winning opening detection switch 12a, gate detection switch 13a, first starting opening detection switch 14a, second starting opening detection switch 15a, first large winning opening detection switch 16a, and second large winning opening detection This occurs when disconnection or connection failure in any of the switches 17a is detected.

  The “abnormal winning error command” is a command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred. In the abnormal winning error, the second start opening detection switch 15a detects a start winning combination of the second start opening 15 after 1.200 seconds have elapsed since the movable piece 15b of the second start opening 15 is closed. When the second large winning opening detection switch 17a detects a winning to the second large winning opening 17 when the movable piece 17b of the second large winning opening 17 is not operating, or the first large winning opening 16 This occurs when a start winning for the first large winning opening 16 is detected by the first large winning opening detection switch 16a when the first large winning opening door 16b is not operating.

  The “ejection error command” is a command indicating that an ejection error has occurred. The discharge error is determined by the number of gaming balls that have passed through the switches 12a, 14a, 15a, 16a, 17a of the winning openings 12, 14, 15, 16, 17 and the number of ball balls that have passed through the frame count switch (not shown) Occurs when the error of exceeds a predetermined number.

  The “magnet detection error command” and the “vibration detection error command” are fraud generation commands that indicate that a fraud has occurred. A magnet detection error occurs when the magnetism detection sensor 18b detects magnetism. The vibration detection error occurs when the vibration detection sensor 18 c detects the vibration of the gaming machine 1.

  "Dish full tank error elimination command" is a command indicating that the full space error has been eliminated. The “counter case error elimination command” is a command indicating that the counter case error has been eliminated. The “counting switch disconnection error elimination command” is a command indicating that the counting switch disconnection error has been eliminated. The "ball-less error elimination command" is a command indicating that the ball-less error elimination command is used to indicate that the ball-less error has been eliminated. The “overdelivery error cancellation command” is a command indicating that the overdelivery error has been eliminated. The “dispensing command error elimination command” is a command indicating that the dispensing command error has been eliminated. The “door opening error elimination command” is a command indicating that the door opening error has been eliminated. The “switch non-connection error elimination command” is a command indicating that the switch non-connection error has been eliminated. The “abnormal winning error canceling command” is a command indicating that the abnormal winning error has been eliminated. The “discharge error cancellation command” is a command indicating that the discharge error has been canceled. The “magnet detection error elimination command” is a command indicating that the magnet detection error has been eliminated. The “vibration detection error elimination command” is a command indicating that the vibration detection error has been eliminated.

  Here, among the above commands, a symbol designation command, a special symbol hold number designation command, a fluctuation stop command, a customer wait designation command, a fluctuation start command, a start winning designation command, a round start command, an opening designation command, an ending designation command, The game state designation command is a command related to the progress of the game on the main control board 110. In the following description, these commands will be referred to as "game commands" as appropriate.

  Power on specification command, RAM clear specification command, power recovery specification command, countersink error command, counter case error command, counting switch disconnection error command, no ball error command, overdelivery error command, payout command error command, door open error Command, switch not connected error command, abnormal winning error command, ejection error command, magnet detection error command, vibration detection error command, counter full error elimination command, counter case error elimination command, counting switch disconnection error elimination command, no ball error elimination Command, overdelivery error cancellation command, withdrawal command error cancellation command, door opening error cancellation command, switch non-connection error cancellation command, abnormal winning error cancellation command, discharge error cancellation command Command, the magnet detection error eliminating command, and a vibration detection error eliminating command is a game progress unrelated special commands in the main control board 110. In the following description, these commands will be referred to as "special commands" as appropriate.

  In FIG. 3, a payout control board 130 is for performing payout control of the gaming balls. The payout control board 130 is bi-directionally communicably connected to the main control board 110. The payout control board 130 includes a one-chip microcomputer composed of a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown). The payout CPU reads out the program stored in the payout ROM based on the input signals from the payout ball count switch 132 and the timer, performs arithmetic processing, and sends the corresponding command to the main control board 110 based on the processing. Send. On the output side of the payout control board 130, the payout motor 131 of the payout device for paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls from the storage portion of the gaming balls is connected. The payout CPU reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM based on a command transmitted from the main control board 110 and performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out a predetermined gaming ball. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the payout CPU.

  The lamp control board 140 controls the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the effect illumination device 34. The lamp control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b and 33c, and the effect illumination device 34. The lamp control board 140 controls, based on various commands transmitted from the effect control board 120, energization control of drive sources such as solenoids and motors for operating the effect drive devices 33a, 33b and 33c, and light in the effect illumination device 34. And drive control of the motor for changing the light irradiation direction.

  The image control board 150 controls the image display device 31 and the audio output device 32. The image control board 150 is communicably connected to the effect control board 120 in both directions. The image control board 150 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a VDP, and an acoustic DSP, which are not shown. The CPU of the image control board 150 executes a program stored in the ROM while using the RAM as a work area. When the command is transmitted from the effect control board 120, the CPU controls the operation of the VDP and the sound DSP by generating a control signal according to the content of the command and outputting the control signal to the VDP and the sound DSP.

  The VDP of the image control board 150 is an image ROM for storing material data necessary for generating an image, a drawing engine for executing drawing processing of an image, and an output for outputting an image drawn by the drawing engine to the image display device 31 It has a circuit. The drawing engine draws an image in a frame buffer using material data stored in the image ROM based on a control signal from the CPU. The output circuit outputs the image drawn in the frame buffer to the image display device 31 at a predetermined timing.

  The sound DSP of the image control board 150 is connected to a sound ROM for storing various sound data relating to music, voice, sound effects and the like, and an SDRAM used as a work area for data processing by the sound DSP. The sound DSP reads sound data corresponding to the control signal from the CPU from the sound ROM to the SDRAM to execute data processing, and amplifies the sound signal obtained by this data processing with a gain corresponding to the control signal from the CPU And outputs the amplified sound signal to the audio output device 32.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1. In the main processing, power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 110 by the start operation (normal start operation, RAM clear start operation, first special start operation, or second special start operation), and the main control board 110 It starts when the system reset occurs in the CPU 110a.

  In FIG. 29, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process (S10). In the initialization process, the main CPU 110a reads and executes a game control program from the main ROM 110b in response to power on. Details of the initialization process will be described later.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a power off monitoring process (S20). In the power-off monitoring process, the main CPU 110a monitors whether or not the power-off of the gaming machine 1 has occurred, and when the power-off has occurred, the firing mechanism (touch sensor 3a, firing volume 3b, firing solenoid 4a, And stop the launch of the game ball by the ball feed solenoid 4b), clear the output port, stop the payout of the game ball by the payout device, create and save the check sum in each storage area of the main RAM 110c, and power off event information After performing a series of processing of setting, the access to the main RAM 110c is set to be prohibited to prepare for power-off. The details of the power-off monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs game random number value update processing (S30). In the gaming random number updating process, the main CPU 110a updates the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation random number value. Next, the main CPU 110a performs initial random number value update processing (S40). In the initial random number update process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random number, the normal symbol initial random number, and the special symbol initial random number.

  After this, the main CPU 110a repeats the loop processing of step S20 to step S40. Further, in addition to this loop processing, the main CPU 110a executes timer interrupt processing each time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit. Details of this timer interrupt process will be described later.

  30 and 31 are flowcharts showing the details of the initialization process (S10) of FIG. In FIG. 31, after the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 performs a security check on the main CPU 110a, the main CPU 110a performs a process of waiting for 2000 ms (S10-1).

  Next, the main CPU 110a permits access to the main RAM 110c (S10-2). Next, the main CPU 110a sets the serial communication port (S10-3). Next, the main CPU 110a sets a watchdog timer (S10-4). Here, the watchdog timer monitors whether or not the one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 operates normally in accordance with the game control program. When an abnormality occurs in the game control program and the game control program being executed is interrupted or stopped, or when only loop processing is repeatedly executed so that another game processing is not executed after interruption of the program execution, When the timer count unit of the watchdog timer counts up during the stop state or the standby state due to the loop processing, the one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 is forcibly initialized.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs an error determination process (S10-5). In the error determination process, the main CPU 110a determines whether an error has occurred, and transmits an error command of the generated error to the effect control board 120 when determining that an error has occurred. Here, the reason for determining an error in the initialization process is as follows. Among the errors, there are some errors that are difficult to eliminate in the state where the gaming machine 1 is operated. If such an error has occurred at the time of activation of the gaming machine 1, it is preferable to notify the occurrence of the error before the gaming machine 1 finishes the initialization processing and shifts to the customer waiting state. From the above reasons, in the gaming machine 1, it is decided that an error is determined in the initialization process.

  Next, the main CPU 110a transmits a power on designation command to the effect control board 120 (S10-6). After that, the main CPU 110a outputs a launch permission signal to the launch control board 160, whereby the game ball by the launch mechanism (a launch mechanism consisting of the touch sensor 3a, the launch volume 3b, the launch solenoid 4a, and the ball feed solenoid 4b) The launch is set to be enabled (S10-7).

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting key 177 is in the ON state (S10-8). When the setting key 177 is in the ON state (S10-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-9. If the setting key 177 is in the OFF state (S10-8: No), the process proceeds to step S10-11 in FIG.

  In step S10-9, it is determined whether the glass door 50 is open. When the glass door 50 is open (S10-9: Yes), it progresses to step S10-10. When the glass door 50 is closed (S10-9: No), it progresses to step S10-11.

  In step S10-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed. If the first special activation operation (FIG. 26A) is performed, the determination result of this step is "No", and if the second special activation operation (FIG. 27) is performed, the determination result of this step " "Yes". When the RAM clear switch 174 is not pressed (S10-10: No), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-30. If the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed (S10-10: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-40.

  In step S10-30, the main CPU 110a performs setting change mode processing. In the setting change mode process, the main CPU 110a performs a process related to the display of the monitor 178 and the update of the setting information of the jackpot lottery probability in the main RAM 110c. In the setting confirmation mode process, a process related to the display of the monitor 178 is performed. Details of the setting change mode process and the setting confirmation mode process will be described later.

  In step S10-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed. When the RAM clear activation operation (FIG. 25) is performed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and when the normal activation operation (FIG. 24) is performed, the determination result of this step is "No". When the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed (S10-11: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-17. If the RAM clear switch 174 is not pressed (S10-11: No), the process proceeds to step S10-12.

  In step S10-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the power failure occurrence information is normal. If the power-off occurrence information is not normal (S10-12: No), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-17. If the power-off occurrence information is normal (S10-12: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-13.

  In step S10-13, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the data in the use area of the main RAM 110c, and proceeds to the next step S10-14. In step S10-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. More specifically, main CPU 110a calculates from the checksum calculated in step S10-13 and the data within the use area of main RAM 110c at that time in the power-off monitoring process (S20) at the time of the previous power failure. Check the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c, and if both match, determine that the checksum is normal (backup is valid and data recovery is possible), and if both do not match, the checksum is not normal (backup Is not effective and data recovery is impossible). When the checksum is not normal (S10-14: No), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-17. If the checksum is normal (S10-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-15.

  In step S10-15, the main CPU 110a sets the main RAM 110c when the backup is effective. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10-16. In step S10-16, the main CPU 110a transmits one of the power recovery 1 designation command, the power recovery 2 designation command, the power recovery 3 designation command, and the power recovery 4 designation command to the effect control board 120. More specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the high probability game flag storage area and the short time game flag storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the high probability game flag is not set and the time short game flag is not set (previous time If the gaming state at the time of power interruption is the low probability gaming state and the non-short time gaming state), the power recovery 1 designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Also, when the high probability game flag is not set and the short time game flag is set (when the gaming state at the time of the previous power off is the low probability game state and the short time game state), the power recovery 2 designation command Is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Further, when the high probability game flag is set and the short time game flag is not set (when the gaming state at the time of the previous power off is the high probability game state and the non-short time game state), the power recovery 3 designated command Is transmitted to the effect control board 120. In addition, when the high probability game flag is set and the short time game flag is set (when the gaming state at the time of the last disconnection is the high probability game state and the short game state), the power recovery 4 designated command Transmit to the effect control board 120. After execution of step S10-16, the present initialization process is ended.

  In step S10-17, the main CPU 110a clears the use area of the main RAM 110c. By clearing the use area, predetermined data in the use area (for example, various random number values and flags backed up at the previous power disconnection) are initialized.

  After execution of step S10-17, the main CPU 110a performs setting of the main RAM 110c when the backup is not effective (S10-18). After that, the main CPU 110a clears the watchdog timer (S10-19). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a transmits a RAM clear designation command to the effect control board 120 (S10-20). After execution of step S10-20, the present initialization process is ended.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing details of setting change mode processing (step S10-30 in FIG. 30). In FIG. 32, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting change command to the effect control board 120 (S10-31). The setting change command is a command indicating that the setting change mode has been entered. Next, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting information in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and causes the monitor 178 to display a number indicating the current setting of the jackpot lottery probability (S10-32). Then, it progresses to step S10-33.

  At step S10-33, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the power of the gaming machine 1 has been cut off. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the power is cut off when the power failure detection signal indicating that the power supply voltage has become equal to or less than the predetermined value is input from the power supply unit (not shown) of the power supply substrate 170. If the power failure detection signal is not input, it is determined that a power failure has not occurred. If the operation to turn off the power switch 174 (FIG. 26B) is performed, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the main CPU 110a determines that the power is not cut off (S10-33: No), the process proceeds to step S10-34. If it is determined that a power failure has occurred (S10-33: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-37.

  In step S10-34, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RAM clear switch 174 has been pressed. If the operation to press the RAM clear switch 174 is performed (FIG. 26B), the determination result of this step is “Yes”. When the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed (S10-34: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-35. If the RAM clear switch 174 is not pressed (S10-34: No), the process proceeds to step S10-33.

  In step S10-35, the main CPU 110a rewrites the setting information in the setting information storage area in the main RAM 110c with the setting of the next stage. Next, the main CPU 110a changes the number of monitors 178 to a number corresponding to the setting information after rewriting (S10-36). Thereafter, the process returns to step S10-33 to repeat the subsequent processing.

  In step S10-37, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of data in the storage area of the main RAM 110c, and stores the created checksum in the main RAM 110c. Here, the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c in this step S10-37 is compared with the checksum calculated from the data in the use area of the main RAM 110c at that time in the initialization processing at the next power on (see FIG. Step S10-14 of 31) It is determined whether the checksum is normal (whether the backup is valid and data recovery is possible or not) based on the presence or absence of a match between the two.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets power-off occurrence information (S10-38). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a sets the access to the main RAM 110c to be prohibited (S10-39). After the execution of the step S10-39, the main CPU 110a performs an infinite loop to prepare for power-off.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing details of setting confirmation mode processing (step S10-40 in FIG. 30). In FIG. 33, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation command to the effect control board 120 (S10-41). The setting confirmation command is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been entered. Next, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting information in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and causes the monitor 178 to display a number indicating the current setting of the jackpot lottery probability (S10-42). Then, it progresses to step S10-43.

  At step S10-43, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the power of the gaming machine 1 has been cut off. When the main CPU 110a determines that the power supply has been interrupted (S10-43: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-47.

  In step S10-47, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of the data in the storage area of the main RAM 110c, and stores the created checksum in the main RAM 110c. Here, the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c in this step S10-47 is compared with the checksum calculated from the data in the use area of the main RAM 110c at that time in the initialization processing at the next power on (see FIG. Step S10-14 of 31) It is determined whether the checksum is normal (whether the backup is valid and data recovery is possible or not) based on the presence or absence of a match between the two.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets power-off occurrence information (S10-48). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a sets the access to the main RAM 110c to be prohibited (S10-49). After the execution of the step S10-49, the main CPU 110a performs an infinite loop to prepare for power-off.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the details of the power-off monitoring process (step S20 in FIG. 29). In FIG. 34, the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 sets the interrupt prohibition (S20-1). Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the power of the gaming machine 1 has been cut off (S20-2). When the main CPU 110a determines that the power failure has not occurred (S20-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S20-3. If it is determined that the power has been turned off (S20-2: No), the process proceeds to step S20-4.

  In step S20-3, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt permission. After executing step S20-3, the main CPU 110a ends the current power-off monitoring process.

  In step S20-4, the main CPU 110a sets the emission of the game ball by the emission mechanism to stop by outputting an emission stop signal to the emission control board 160. Next, the main CPU 110a clears the output port (S20-5). After that, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-off designation command to the payout control board 130 (S20-6). When receiving the power-off designation command, the payout control board 130 sends back a command related to the output of the external information. The main CPU 110a receives the command relating to the output of the external information, and stores it in the main RAM 110c (S20-7).

  After execution of step S20-7, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of data in the storage area of the main RAM 110c, and stores the created checksum in the main RAM 110c (S20-8). Here, the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c in step S20-8 is compared with the checksum calculated from the data in the use area of the main RAM 110c at that time in the initialization processing at the next power on (see FIG. Step S10-14 of 31) It is determined whether the checksum is normal (whether the backup is valid and data recovery is possible or not) based on the presence or absence of a match between the two.

  After the execution of step S20-8, the main CPU 110a sets power failure occurrence information (S20-9). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a sets the access to the main RAM 110c to be prohibited (S20-10). After the execution of step S20-10, the main CPU 110a performs an infinite loop to prepare for power-off.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110. The main CPU 110 a of the main control board 110 executes timer interrupt processing every four milliseconds which is a generation cycle of the reset clock pulse signal in the reset clock pulse generation circuit in the main control board 110.

  In FIG. 35, when the reset clock pulse signal is generated, the main CPU 110a saves the information in the register of the main CPU 110a at that point in the stack area (S100). Next, the main CPU 110a performs time control processing (S110). The time control process is a process of updating a counter used to count various times in the main RAM 110c. In the time control process, the main CPU 110a subtracts one from each of the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the auxiliary game timer counter in the main RAM 110c.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs random number update processing (S120). In the random number updating process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot random number value, the normal symbol random number value, and the special symbol random number value. More specifically, the main CPU 110 a updates each random number counter by +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one revolution), the random number counter is returned to 0, and the respective random number values are newly updated from the initial random number value at that time. .

  After execution of step S120, the main CPU 110a performs initial random number value update processing (S130). In the initial random number update process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random number, the normal symbol initial random number, and the special symbol initial random number.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs input control processing (S200). In the input control process, the main CPU 110a is a general winning opening detection switch 12a, a first large winning opening detection switch 16a, a second large winning opening detection switch 17a, a first starting opening detection switch 14a, a second starting opening detection switch 15a, It is determined whether or not there is an input to the various switches of the gate detection switch 13a, and if there is an input, predetermined data is set. Details of the procedure of the input control process will be described later.

  After execution of step S200, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure special power control process (S300). In the special figure special power control process, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the special figure special power processing data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, while the special symbol storage determination process (special figure special power processing Processing when data = 0), special symbol variation processing (processing when special figure special power processing data = 1), special symbol stop processing (processing when special figure special power processing data = 2), jackpot gaming processing (specially One of the five processes of the figure special power process data = 3 process and the jackpot game end process (special figure special power process data = 4 process) is selected and executed. The details of the procedure of the special figure special power control process will be described later.

  After execution of step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a general-purpose power control process (S400). In the common drawing common control process, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the common drawing common processing data provided in the main RAM 110c in accordance with the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, while the normal symbol storage determination process (general drawing Processing when normal processing data = 0), normal symbol variation processing (processing when general drawing general processing data = 1), normal symbol stopping processing (processing when general drawing general processing data = 2), And one of the four processings of the auxiliary game processing (processing in the case of common drawing common processing processing data = 3) is selected and executed. The details of the routine of the common control routine control process will be described later.

  After execution of step S400, the main CPU 110a performs payout control processing (S500). In the payout control process, the main CPU 110a refers to the general winning opening prize ball counter, the first starting opening prize ball counter, and the second starting opening prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c, and pays out the number of gaming balls indicated by each counter. Is generated, and this command is transmitted to the payout control board 130. When the payout control board 130 receives the payout amount designation command, the payout control substrate 130 controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out the gaming balls.

  After execution of step S500, the main CPU 110a performs data generation processing (S600). In the data generation process, the main CPU 110a is external output data, starting opening opening / closing solenoid data, first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, special symbol display device data, ordinary symbol display device data, Generate memory number specification command.

  After execution of step S600, the main CPU 110a performs an error determination process (S700). In the error determination process, the main CPU 110a determines whether an error has occurred, and sets an error command indicating the type of the occurred error in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when determining that an error has occurred. . Further, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the generated error has been eliminated, and when it is determined that the error has been eliminated, sets an error elimination command indicating the eliminated error in the effect transmission data storage area.

  After execution of step S700, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing (S800). In the output control process, the main CPU 110a outputs signals of external output data, starting opening / closing solenoid data, first large winning opening / closing solenoid data, and second large winning opening / closing solenoid data created in the data generation process of step S600. Perform port output processing. In addition, to turn on each LED of the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, and the normal symbol display device 22, the special symbol display device data and the ordinary created in the data generation process of the above-mentioned step S600. A display device output process is performed to output symbol display device data. Furthermore, a command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c to the effect control board 120 is also performed.

  After execution of step S800, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a (S900).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing details of the input control process. In FIG. 36, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process (S210). In the general winning a prize opening detection switch input processing, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input of a detection signal from the general winning a prize opening detection switch 12a. If no detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S220. When there is an input of the detection signal, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is added to the general winning a prize winning ball counter in the main RAM 110 c and updated.

  After execution of step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process (S220). In the special winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input of a detection signal from the first large winning opening detection switch 16a or the second large winning opening detection switch 17a. When there is no input of a detection signal from any of the first large winning opening detection switch 16a and the second large winning opening detection switch 17a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S230 as it is. When the detection signal is input from the first large winning opening detection switch 16a or the second large winning opening detection switch 17a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) is added to the large winning opening prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c. Then, the number of big winning opening balls (C) in the main RAM 110c (C) storage area is updated by +1.

  After execution of step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting opening detection switch input process (S230). In the first start opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input of a detection signal from the first start opening detection switch 14a. If there is no input of the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S240 as it is. When there is an input of the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 14a, the update of the winning ball counter, the determination of whether the first special symbol holding number (U1) is less than 4, the first special symbol holding Update of the first special symbol holding number (U1) when the number (U1) is less than 4, storage of random numbers in special symbol holding storage area, pre-judgment of jackpot lottery and start winning specification according to the judgment result A series of processing such as a set of command, a set of special symbol hold number specification command according to the first special symbol hold number (U1), etc. is performed. Details of the procedure of the first starting opening detection switch input process will be described later.

  After execution of step S230, the main CPU 110a performs second start port detection switch input processing (S240). In the second start opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input of a detection signal from the second start opening detection switch 15a. When there is no input of the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 15a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S250 as it is. When there is an input of the detection signal from the second starting opening detection switch 15a, the update of the winning ball counter, the determination of whether the second special symbol holding number (U2) is less than 4, the second special symbol holding Update of the second special symbol holding number (U2) when the number (U2) is less than 4, storage of random numbers in special symbol holding storage area, pre-judgment of jackpot lottery and start winning specification according to the judgment result A series of processing such as a set of command, a set of special symbol hold number specification command according to the hold number (U2) in the second special symbol hold number (U2), etc. is performed. The procedure of the second start port detection switch input process and the procedure of the first start port detection switch input process are the same except for the difference in the data write destination.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing (S250). In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input of a detection signal from the gate detection switch 13a. When there is no input of the detection signal from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110a ends the current input control process as it is. When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 13a is input, the main CPU 110a generates a gate passage designation command, and sets the generated gate passage designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Further, in this case, the main CPU 110a determines whether the count value (G) of the normal symbol holding number counter that counts the normal symbol holding number (G) is less than four. Then, when the count value (G) of the normal symbol holding number counter is less than 4, the count value (G) is incremented by 1 and updated, and an ordinary symbol random number value is acquired, and the acquired ordinary symbol random number value is ordinary Store in the symbol storage area.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing details of the first starting opening detection switch input process. In FIG. 37, when there is an input of a detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 14a (S230-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S230-2. When there is no input of the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 14a (S230-1: No), the current first starting opening detection switch input processing is ended.

  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a adds a predetermined number (for example, three) to the starting opening prize ball counter and updates it (S230-2). After that, the main CPU 110a determines whether the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter for counting the first special symbol hold number (U1) is less than 4 (S230-3).

  When the count value (U1) of the first special symbol holding number counter is not less than 4 (S230-3: No), the main CPU 110a ends the current first start port detection switch input process. When the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter is less than 4 (S230-3: Yes), the count value (U1) is incremented by 1 and updated (S230-4).

  After execution of step S230-4, the main CPU 110a acquires the jackpot random number value, and the data is not stored in the first to fourth storage portions of the first special symbol hold storage area of the special symbol hold storage area and the number is the most A small storage unit is used as the data storage destination, and the acquired jackpot random number value is stored in the storage unit of the data storage destination (S230-5).

  FIG. 38 (a) is a diagram showing a special symbol hold storage area. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the special symbol storage area is the zeroth storage unit corresponding to the variation, the first special symbol storage area corresponding to the first special symbol storage, and the second special symbol It has a second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to hold. Each of the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area is a first storage unit corresponding to the first hold, a second storage unit corresponding to the second hold, and a third memory corresponding to the third hold And a fourth storage unit corresponding to the fourth hold. As shown in FIG. 38 (b), each storage unit in the special symbol holding storage unit can store a set of a jackpot random number value, a special symbol random number value, a reach determination random number value, and a special figure variation random number value It has become.

  After execution of step S230-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the special symbol random number value, and stores the acquired special symbol random number value in the storage part of the data storage destination in the first special symbol hold storage area (S230-6) .

  After execution of step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure variation random number value and the reach determination random number value, and the acquired special figure variation random number value and the reach determination random number value is the first special symbol hold storage area Are stored in the storage unit of the storage destination of the data in (S230-7).

  After execution of step S230-7, the main CPU 110a performs predetermination processing (S230-8). In this preliminary determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table of the main ROM 110b, and flags the high probability gaming flag storage area and the time saving gaming flag storage area at the time of execution of step S230-8 (when the starting condition is satisfied). Presence or absence of the set, the jackpot random number value stored in the storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area in step S230-5 ~ S230-7, a special symbol random number value, a random value for reach determination, and a random number value for special figure variation The winning combination information of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol of this time is determined based on the combination with the above.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a prior determination table for determining in advance the result of the jackpot lottery. In the prior judgment table, big hit random number value, special symbol random number value, gaming state (short time gaming state or non short time gaming state), random number value for reach judgment, special figure fluctuation random number value, winning information, and start winning specified command The set refers to when the start condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied and to the reference when the start condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied And are stored separately.

  In FIG. 37, after execution of step S230-8, main CPU 110a generates a start winning combination designation command corresponding to the winning combination information determined in the prior determination process of step S230-8, and transmits this start winning combination designation command as transmission data for effect The storage area is set (S230-9). After that, the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter and generates a special symbol hold number specification command indicating the first special symbol hold number (U1), and designates this special symbol hold number A command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S230-10).

  The start winning combination designation command and the special symbol hold number designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area are transmitted to the effect control board 120 in the output control process (S700) of the timer interrupt process. The effect control board 120 determines the content of the effect prior to the change of the special symbol based on the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol this time based on the description content of the start winning designation command, and designates the content of the determined effect Command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  Here, the procedure of the second starting opening detection switch input process (S240) is that the reference destination of the number of reservations in steps S230-3 and S230-4 is the second special symbol reservation number counter, steps S230-5 to S230 The point where the storage destination of the random number value in -7 is the second special symbol hold storage area, the reference destination of the random number in step S230-8 is the second special symbol hold storage area, and the number of reservations in step S230-10 Is the same as that of the first starting opening detection switch input process (S230) except that the reference destination of is the second special symbol holding number counter.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the details of the special view special power control process. In FIG. 40, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special power process data (S301). In the following step S302, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special view special power process data, and shifts the process to the special symbol storage determination process (step S310) if special view special power process data = 0. If special power processing data = 1, the processing is shifted to special symbol variation processing (step S320), and if special power processing special data processing data = 2, the processing is shifted to special symbol stopping processing (step S330), special power special processing data = If it is 3, the processing is shifted to the jackpot gaming processing (step S340), and if the special figure special power processing data = 4, the processing is shifted to the jackpot gaming ending processing (step S350).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol storage determination process. In FIG. 41, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is in progress (S310-1). More specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter in the main RAM 110c, and determines that the special symbol is being variably displayed if the special symbol time counter is not 0, and the special symbol time counter is 0 If it is, it is determined that the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. The main CPU 110a ends the current special symbol storage determination process when the special symbol is being changed and displayed (S310-1: Yes). Moreover, when the change display of the special symbol is not in progress (S310-1: No), it progresses to step S310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U2) of the second special symbol hold number counter of the main RAM 110c, and determines whether the second special symbol hold number (U2) is 1 or more. When the second special symbol holding number (U2) is 1 or more (S310-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a updates the count value (U2) of the second special symbol holding number counter by 1 and updates it (S310- 3). Here, the gaming machine 1 is a type in which the suspension of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized over the suspension of the variation of the first special symbol. In a gaming machine of such a type, during the time saving gaming state, even if the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, the prior determination is not performed.

  When the count value (U2) of the second special symbol hold number counter is not 1 or more (S310-2: No), the main CPU 110a refers to the count value (U1) of the first special symbol hold number counter, and the first special It is determined whether the number of symbol holding (U1) is one or more (S310-4).

  When the first special symbol holding number (U1) is not 1 or more (S310-4: No), the main CPU 110a performs customer waiting setting processing (S310-5). In the customer waiting setting process, the main CPU 110a confirms whether or not the customer waiting flag is set in the customer waiting flag storage area. When the customer waiting flag is not set in the customer waiting flag storage area, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting designation command in the effect transmission data storage area and sets the customer waiting flag in the customer waiting flag storage area.

  When the first special symbol holding number (U1) is 1 or more (S310-4: Yes), the main CPU 110a updates the count value (U1) of the first special symbol holding number counter by 1 and updates it (S310- 6). After execution of step S310-3 or S310-6, the main CPU 110a performs storage area shift processing (S310-7). In the storage area shift process, the main CPU 110a processes the first special symbol holding storage area and the second special symbol holding storage area that correspond to the one of the ones obtained by subtracting the number of holdings in step S310-3 or S310-6. Perform the following processing as a target.

  When the main CPU 110a subtracts the count value (U2) of the second special symbol holding number counter in step S310-3, each of the data in the second to fourth storage units of the second special symbol holding storage area is 1 The data is shifted to the previous storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area is written to the zeroth storage unit which is the determination storage area. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random number values (big hit random number value, special symbol random number value, reach determination random number value, special figure variation random number value) which have been stored in the 0th storage unit are erased Be done.

  Further, when the main CPU 110a subtracts the count value (U1) of the first special symbol holding number counter in step S310-6, the data in the second to fourth storage units of the first special symbol holding storage area are respectively stored. The data in the first storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area is written to the zeroth storage unit. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random number values (big hit random number value, special symbol random number value, reach determination random number value, special figure variation random number value) which have been stored in the 0th storage unit are erased Be done.

  After execution of step S310-7, the main CPU 110a checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is set in the customer waiting flag storage area, and if the customer waiting flag is set in the customer waiting flag storage area, It clears (S310-8).

  After execution of step S310-8, the main CPU 110a generates a special symbol hold number specification command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the first special symbol hold number (U1) and the second special symbol hold number (U2). Then, this special symbol holding number specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S310-9).

  After executing step S310-9, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process (S311). In this jackpot determination process, the main CPU 110a determines the lottery result (jackpot or loss) of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the current start condition, and determines the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot and the jackpot determined A jackpot design command corresponding to the type of jackpot is generated and set in the effect transmission data storage area. If it is a loss, a symbol designating command for losing is generated and set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Explaining in more detail, the main CPU 110a, in this jackpot determination process, as shown in FIG. 42 (flowchart showing details of jackpot determination process), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the current start condition is a jackpot It is determined which of the two and the loss (S311-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot lottery determination table corresponding to the current setting in the main ROM 110b, and determines whether or not the flag of the high probability game flag storage area is set at the time of execution of step S311-1. The lottery result is determined based on the combination with the jackpot random number value stored in the 0 th storage unit in S310-7.

  FIG. 43A shows the jackpot lottery determination table referred to in step S311-1. As shown in FIG. 43 (a), in the jackpot lottery determination table, there are a setting 1 table, a setting 2 table, a setting 3 table, a setting 4 table, a setting 5 table, and a setting 6 There is a table. In the big hit lottery determination tables of settings 1 to 6, the combination of the big hit random number value and the lottery result (big hit or loss) of the big hit lottery refers to when referring to the low probability gaming state and to the high probability gaming state It is divided into things and stored.

  In the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 1, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the low probability gaming state is 0 to 598, and the value of the jackpot among 0 to 598 is 2 values ("7" and "8") It is. In addition, in the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 1, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the high probability gaming state is 0 to 598, and the 20 for the jackpot among 0 to 598 will be the 20 values ("7" to "26 ").

  In the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 2, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the low probability gaming state is 0 to 578, and the value of the jackpot among 0 to 578 is 2 values ("7" and "8") It is. In addition, in the big hit lottery determination table of setting 2, the random number range of the big hit random number value in the high probability gaming state is 0 to 598 which is the same as setting 1 and among the 0 to 598 7 "to" 26 ").

  In the big hit lottery determination table of setting 3, the random number range of the big hit random number value in the low probability gaming state is 0 to 548, and the big hit among 0 to 548 is 2 values ("7" and "8") It is. Moreover, in the big hit lottery determination table of setting 3, the random number range of the big hit random number value in the high probability gaming state is 0 to 598 which is the same as setting 1 and among the 0 to 598 7 "to" 26 ").

  In the big hit lottery determination table of setting 4, the random number range of the big hit random number value in the low probability gaming state is 0 to 528, and the big hit among 0 to 528 is 2 values ("7" and "8") It is. Moreover, in the big hit lottery determination table of setting 4, the random number range of the big hit random number value in the high probability gaming state is 0 to 598 which is the same as setting 1 and among 20 to 5 7 "to" 26 ").

  In the jackpot lottery table of setting 5, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the low probability gaming state is 0 to 508, and the jackpot among 0 to 508 is 2 values ("7" and "8") It is. In addition, in the jackpot lottery determination table of setting 5, the random number range of the jackpot random number value in the high probability gaming state is 0 to 598 which is the same as setting 1 and among 20 to 5 7 "to" 26 ").

  In the big hit lottery determination table of setting 6, the random number range of the big hit random number value in the low probability gaming state is 0 to 488, and the big hit among 0 to 488 is two values ("7" and "8") It is. Moreover, in the big hit lottery determination table of setting 6, the random number range of the big hit random number value in the high probability gaming state is 0 to 598 which is the same as setting 1 and among the 0 to 598 7 "to" 26 ").

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the random number range of the jackpot random number value is changed by setting, and is 0 to 598, 0 to 578, 0 to 548, 0 to 528, 0 to 508, 0 to 488. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability gaming state is 1/599 (= 1 / 299.5), 1/579 (= 1 / 289.5), 1/549 (= 1 / 274.5), 1 It is any one of / 529 (= 1 / 264.5), 1/509 (= 1 / 254.5), and 1/489 (= 1 / 244.5). On the other hand, the random number range in the high probability gaming state is not changed by setting, and the winning probability of the jackpot is 20/599 (= 1 / 29.9) regardless of the setting. It is also possible to change the jackpot winning probability in the low probability gaming state by fixing the random number range at the low probability with a large numerical value (for example, 65536) and changing the number of jackpot random numbers by setting. Also in this case, it is desirable that the jackpot probability in the high probability gaming state be fixed by fixing the number of jackpot random number values in the high probability gaming state. When the setting is changed to the winning probability of the high probability gaming state, it is easy for the player to see which setting is set, which is effective in preventing this.

  If the determination result in step S311-1 is a big hit (S311-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S311-2, and if the determination result in step S311-1 is a loss (S311-1: No), the process proceeds to step S311-5.

  In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot symbol determination processing. In this jackpot symbol determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b and stops the variation symbol based on the special symbol random number value stored in the zero storage unit in step S310-8. The symbol data is determined, and the determined stop symbol data is stored in the stop symbol data storage area in the main RAM 110c. Here, the stop symbol data indicates the number of two digits ("00" to "07") corresponding to the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed after the change.

  FIG. 44 (a) is a diagram showing a jackpot symbol determination table. A set of special symbol random number, special symbol type (type of big hit), stop symbol data, and symbol designation command in the symbol determination table for the big hit is the starting condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 Are stored separately as those to be referred to when the second symbol is established and those to be referred to when the starting condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is established.

  The symbol designating command is a command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed after the change.

  The stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area in the present step S311-2 is at the determination of the big hit symbol in the special symbol stop processing, at the time of determination of the operation mode of the big winning opening in the big hit game processing, in the big hit game end processing. It is referred to when determining the gaming state. Details will be described later.

  Next, the main CPU 110a generates a jackpot symbol designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-2 and sets the symbol designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (S311-3).

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines the gaming state at the current time (at the time of the jackpot lottery) based on the presence or absence of the flag set in the high probability gaming flag storage area and the time saving gaming flag storage area, and gaming state information indicating the determined gaming state The game state buffer is stored (S311-4). Specifically, when both the high probability game flag and the time saving game flag are not set, the main CPU 110a sets data of "00H" in the game state buffer as game state information. Further, when the high probability game flag is set and the short time game flag is not set, data of "01H" is set in the game state buffer as game state information. Further, when the high probability game flag is not set and the short time game flag is set, data of “02H” is set in the game state buffer as the game state information. If both the high probability game flag and the time saving game flag are set, data of "03H" is set in the game state buffer as game state information.

  In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a performs lost symbol determination processing. In the lost symbol determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the lost symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b to determine the stop symbol data of the stop symbol of the loss and stores the determined stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area.

  FIG. 44 (b) is a diagram showing a lost symbol determination table. In the symbol determination table for lost, the combination of the type of special symbol, stop symbol data and symbol designation command refers to the first special symbol display device 20 when the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. (2) The special symbol display device 21 is separately stored as one to be referred to when the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 110a generates a symbol designating command for losing corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-5, and sets the symbol designating command in the effect transmission data storage area (S311-6).

  It returns to the explanation of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process (S311), the main CPU 110a performs a variation pattern determination process (S312). In the variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table of the main ROM 110b, and the lottery result (big hit or lose) of the big hit lottery in step S311-1 and the time-saving game flag storage area at the time of execution of step S312. Whether or not the flag is set, the number of pending calls (U2) or (U1) after updating in step S310-3 or step S310-6, the jackpot random number value stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-7, the random number value for reach determination And a variation pattern of the variation based on the combination of the random number values for variation of the special figure and the special figure.

  There are two types of variation pattern determination tables, one to be referred to when the first special symbol varies, and one to be referred to when the second special symbol varies. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table to be referred to when the first special symbol changes. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table to be referred to at the time of variation of the second special symbol.

  Here, the gaming machine 1 can change the setting of the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the low probability gaming state by the first special activation operation (FIG. 26A), but the variation of the first special symbol The variation pattern determination table referred to sometimes and the variation pattern determination table referred to at the variation of the second special symbol are common. Even in the case where the variation pattern determination table to be referred to for each setting is different, in order to prevent the player from being overlooked which setting is made due to the difference in the variation pattern selection rate, the selection rate is made common. It is good to leave.

  Thereby, regardless of the setting, the selection rate of each reach → development effect at the time of jackpot variation is fixed, and the selection rate of each reach → development effect at the time of outlier fluctuation is also fixed. Therefore, since the variation pattern selection rate common to each setting is set, the more the setting of the winning probability is more advantageous to the player, the higher the overall appearance rate of the reach → development effect can be. Also, as the setting of the winning probability is more advantageous to the player, it is possible to increase the overall reliability of reach → development effect.

  However, the winning probability of the high probability is common to each setting, and the variation pattern determination table to be referred to when the first special symbol changes and the variation pattern determination table to be referred to when the second special symbol changes are also common. From the above, at the time of high probability, since the appearance rate and the degree of reliability of each reach → development effect are not changed by the setting of the winning probability, it is difficult for the player to recognize which setting is made.

  In the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol, the kind of special symbol (type of big hit), gaming state (time short game state or non time short game state), number of reservations, random number value for reach judgment, random number value for special figure fluctuation, special A set of pattern variation pattern types, variation times, and variation start commands are stored. The change start command is a command for notifying the effect control board 120 of the type of change pattern.

  In the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it is easy to select a variation pattern with a long variation time. Conversely, in the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected.

  For example, the option of the variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol 1 (per 16R probability variation) in the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 45 is that of the variation patterns 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 17 There are seven types.

  The variation patterns 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 are for advancing from the establishment of the reach to the development effect. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 11 is T1 (for example, T1 = 18000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 12 is T2 (for example, T2 = 20000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 13 is T3 (for example, T3 = 22000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 14 is T4 (for example, T4 = 40000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 15 is T5 (for example, T5 = 42000 ms). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 16 is T6 (for example, T6 = 60000 ms). The fluctuation pattern 17 is to proceed from the reach establishment to the all rotation reach effect. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 17 is T7 (T7 = 62000 ms). The magnitude relationship of the fluctuation times T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, and T7 is T1 <T2 <T3 <T4 <T5 <T5 <T6 <T7. Among the variation patterns 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 and 17, the magnitude relationship of the six types of selectivity excluding the variation pattern 17 is: variation pattern 11 <variation pattern 12 <variation pattern 13 <variation pattern 14 < The variation pattern 15 is less than the variation pattern 16.

  Also, in the variation pattern determination table of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 45, special symbol 0 (loss), non time saving game state, number of reservations 0 to 2, with reach (random number for reach determination is “70 to 99”) There are seven types of variation patterns 9, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and the corresponding variation pattern options. The fluctuation pattern 9 is a thing (normal reach loss) which loses without progressing to development development from reach establishment. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern 9 is T9 (for example, T9 = 6000 ms). The magnitude relationship of selectivity of variation patterns 9, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 is: variation pattern 9> variation pattern 1> variation pattern 2> variation pattern 3> variation pattern 4> variation pattern 5> variation pattern It is six.

  Also, when comparing the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol with the prior determination table (FIG. 39) shown above, in the prior determination table, the number of pending changes in the first special symbol (U1) and the second special symbol It is possible to search for the corresponding data in the table without referring to the number of pending changes (U2). On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination table, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the number of suspension of the first special symbol fluctuation (U1) and the number of suspension of the second special symbol fluctuation (U2) are not referred to As long as the corresponding data in the table can not be searched. For this reason, in the prior determination table, although it is possible to determine the type of the effect of the development destination after the reach effect, it is not possible to determine the “normal fluctuation” and the “shortening fluctuation”.

  In FIG. 41, the main CPU 110a generates a change start command corresponding to the change pattern determined in step S312, and sets the change start command in the effect transmission data storage area (S313).

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines the current gaming state based on the presence / absence of a set of flags in the high probability gaming flag storage area and the short time gaming flag storage area, and generates a gaming state designation command corresponding to the determined gaming state. The game state specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S314).

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs processing for starting variable display of the special symbol (S315). Specifically, the main CPU 110a sets, in a predetermined processing area, variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to perform variable symbol display (flashing of the LED) of the special symbol. set. When the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, data of lighting or extinguishing of the LED is created in the above-mentioned step S600, and the created data is outputted in the step S700, whereby the first special symbol display device 20 is produced. Alternatively, variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets a variation time based on the variation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter (S316). The special symbol time counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets special figure special power process data = 1 (S317), and ends the current special symbol storage determination process. In the special figure special power control process after this, the process moves to the special symbol variation process in step S302, and the special symbol variation process is performed.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation process. In FIG. 47, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has passed (S320-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S316 and determines that the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed if the special symbol time counter is 0, and the special symbol time counter is 0 If not, it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has not yet passed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the variation time of the special symbol has passed (S320-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S320-2. Moreover, when it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has not elapsed (S320-1: No), the current special symbol variation process is ended, and the next subroutine is executed.

  At step S320-2, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, the main CPU 110a clears the variable display data set in step S315, and sets the special symbol set in step S311-2 or S311-5 to the first special symbol display device 20 or the first special symbol display device 20. 2 Stop symbol data for causing the special symbol display device 21 to stop and display is set in a predetermined processing area (S320-2). As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets a change stop command in the effect transmission data storage area (S320-3).

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 second = 125 counter) in the special symbol time counter (S320-4). The special symbol time counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 milliseconds in step S110.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets 2 to the special figure special power process data (S320-5), and ends the current special symbol variation process. In the special figure special power control process after this, the process moves to the special symbol stop process in step S302, and the special symbol stop process is performed.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stopping process. In FIG. 48, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol has passed (S330-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S320-4, and determines that the special symbol stop time has elapsed if the special symbol time counter is 0, and the special symbol time counter If it is not 0, it is determined that the stop time of the special symbol has not yet passed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the stop time of the special symbol has passed (S330-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330-2. When it is determined that the stop time of the special symbol has not elapsed (S330-1: No), the current special symbol stop process is ended, and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game end determination process. In the time saving game end determination process, the main CPU 110a checks whether the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area. If the time-short game flag is not set in the time-short game flag storage area, the process proceeds directly to step S330-3. If the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area, the number of time saving times (J) in the time saving (J) storage area is decremented by 1 and updated, and the time saving number after updating (J) is 0 It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the number of time saving (J) is 0, the time saving game flag set in the time saving game flag storage area is cleared, and then the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the time saving number (J) is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S330-3 with the time saving game flag set in the time saving game flag storage area.

  At step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game end determination processing. In the high probability game end determination process, the main CPU 110a confirms whether the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area. If the high probability game flag is not set in the high probability game flag storage area, the process proceeds directly to step S330-4. If the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, the high probability game count (X) in the high probability game count (X) storage area is decremented by 1 and updated, and the high probability after the update It is determined whether the number of times played (X) is zero. As a result, when the high probability game number (X) is 0, the high probability game flag set in the high probability game flag storage area is cleared, and then the process proceeds to step S330-4. If the high probability game number (X) is not 0, the process proceeds to step S330-4 while the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area.

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a determines the gaming state at the present time based on the presence / absence of the flag set in the high probability gaming flag storage area and the time saving gaming flag storage area, and the gaming state designation command corresponding to the determined gaming state The game state specification command is generated and set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a big hit or a lose (S330-5). If the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is lost (S330-5: No), the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the special view special power process data (S330-6), and the current special symbol stop End the process. In special figure special power control processing after this, processing moves to special symbol memory decision processing in step S302, special symbol memory decision processing is done.

  If the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a big hit (S330-5: Yes), the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special view special power process data (S330-10). Next, the main CPU 110a resets the gaming state at that time, the high probability game number (X), and the time reduction number (J) (S330-11). Specifically, when the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a clears data of the high probability game flag storage area and the high probability game count (X) storage area. . Further, when the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a clears the data of the time saving game flag storage area and the time saving (J) storage area.

  After execution of step S330-11, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot start preparation setting processing (S330-12). In the jackpot start preparation setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game control table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area, the large winning opening opening control table for 16R per, large for 8R per Of the winning opening / closing control table and the 2R-per-large winning opening / closing control table, the one to be referred to is determined.

  FIG. 49 shows a special game control table. FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening and closing control table for the 16R. FIG. 50 (b) is a diagram showing an 8R per large winning opening / closing control table. FIG. 50 (c) is a diagram showing a 2R winning large winning opening opening and closing control table.

  In the special game control table, combinations of stop symbol data, opening time, table number of the reference winning prize winning opening / closing control table, and ending time are stored for each type of jackpot. Here, the table number of the 16R per large winning opening opening and closing control table is 01, the table number of the 8R per large winning opening opening and closing control table is 02, and the table number of the 2R per large winning opening opening and closing control table is It is 03.

  The opening and closing times of the first to sixteenth rounds per 16R are stored in the 16R per large winning opening / closing control table, and data indicating the types of large winning openings to be opened are stored. In the 8R per large winning opening opening and closing control table, data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first to eighth rounds per 8R and data indicating the type of large winning opening to be opened are stored. The 2R per large winning opening opening / closing control table stores data indicating the opening time and closing time of the first round to the second round per 2R, and the type of large winning opening to be opened.

  Main CPU 110a determines the type of jackpot based on the big winning opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, generates an opening designation command according to the type of jackpot, and transmits the opening designation command to the effect transmission data It sets to a storage area (S330-13).

  Main CPU 110a determines the start interval time according to the type of jackpot based on the large winning opening opening and closing control table determined in step S330-12, and sets the start interval time to the special symbol time counter (S330-14) ), End the special symbol stop processing this time. In the special view special power control process after this, the process moves to the jackpot game processing in step S302, and the jackpot game processing is performed.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot gaming process. In FIG. 51, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening is currently in progress (S340-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area, and determines that the opening is in progress if the number of rounds (R) is 0, and the number of rounds (R) If is not 0, it is determined that the opening is not in progress. If the main CPU 110a is in the process of opening (S340-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-2. If the opening is not in progress (S340-1: No), the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  At step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the start interval time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S330-14 of the special symbol stop process, and determines that the start interval time has elapsed if the special symbol time counter is 0, and the special CPU time special If the symbol time counter is not 0, it is determined that the start interval time has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the start interval time has elapsed (S340-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-3. Moreover, when it is determined that the start interval time has not yet passed (S340-2: No), the present jackpot gaming process is ended.

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot start setting processing. In the jackpot start setting process, the main CPU 110 a updates the number of rounds (R) by incrementing the number of rounds (R) in the storage area. Here, when the start interval time has elapsed, the operation has not been performed even once, and the number of rounds (R) is the number of rounds (R) in the storage area. Therefore, the number of rounds (R) after the update in step S340-3 is one.

  After execution of step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process (S340-4). In this big winning opening opening process, in order to open the first big winning opening opening and closing door 16b or the second large winning opening opening and closing door 17b, the first large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 16c or the second large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 17c is energized. Set the energization data. Further, main CPU 110a refers to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and finds the opening time of first large winning opening 16 or second large winning opening 17 in the current number of rounds (R). , This opening time is set to the special game timer counter.

  After execution of step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs round start command transmission determination processing (S340-5). In the round start command transmission determination process, the main CPU 110a generates a round start command according to the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area, and sets the round start command in the transmission data storage area for effect. , End the present jackpot gaming process.

  At step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently ending. When the main CPU 110a determines that the end is not being performed (S340-6: No), the process proceeds to step S340-7. If it is determined that the ending is in progress (S340-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-18.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening is closing. Specifically, the main CPU 110a does not set energization data (energization data for energizing the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. If it is determined that the winning opening is closed and energization data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, it is determined that the special opening is not closing. If the main CPU 110a is closing the special winning opening (S340-7: YES), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-8. If the special winning opening is not closed (S340-7: No), the process proceeds to step S340-9.

  In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing time has elapsed. Here, the closing time is set to the special game timer counter in step S340-10 described later. If the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time has elapsed (S340-8: Yes), it proceeds to the special winning opening opening process of step S340-4 and proceeds to the special winning opening opening process and the round start command transmission determination process (S340). -5) to complete the present jackpot gaming process. When the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time has not elapsed (S340-8: No), the present jackpot gaming process is ended.

  At step S340-9, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the open end condition of the special winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, the main CPU 110a is released when the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the large winning opening ball number (C) storage area reaches a prescribed number (9) or the opening time has elapsed. It is determined that the end condition is satisfied. In the main CPU 110a, the number of big wins in the number of big wins (C) storage area (C) in the storage area has not reached the specified number (9), and the opening time has not passed In the case, it is determined that the open end condition is not satisfied. When the main CPU 110a determines that the release end condition is satisfied (S340-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-10. When it is determined that the open end condition is not satisfied (S340-9: No), the present jackpot gaming process is ended.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the main CPU 110a closes the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b by the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid The energization data for energizing 17c is stopped. Further, the main CPU 110a refers to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and based on the current number of rounds (R), the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17 The closing time is set to the special game timer counter. This will close the special winning opening.

  After execution of step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one round game has ended (S340-11). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs one round game when the number of large winning opening balls (C) in the large winning opening ball number (C) storage area reaches a prescribed number (9). It determines that it has ended. Also, the main CPU 110a ends one round game when the number of large winning prize balls (C) in the large winning ball count (C) storage area has not reached the specified number (9). It judges that it is not. If the main CPU 110a determines that one round game has ended (S340-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round game has not ended (S340-11: No), the present jackpot gaming process is ended.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs round data initialization processing. In the round data initialization process, the main CPU 110a resets the number of big winning entrance balls (C) in the number of big winning entrance balls (C) storage area to zero.

  After execution of step S340-12, main CPU 110a determines that the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area is the maximum value (specifically, the final winning opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12 It is determined whether or not the number of rounds has been reached (S340-13).

  When it is determined that the number of rounds (R) does not reach the maximum value (S340-13: No), the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area and updates (S340) -14), The current jackpot game processing ends.

  If it is determined that the number of rounds (R) has reached the maximum value (S340-13: Yes), the main CPU 110a resets the number of rounds (R) in the number of rounds (R) storage area to 0 (S340). 15).

  After execution of step S340-15, the main CPU 110a determines the type of jackpot based on the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step S330-12, and generates an ending specification command according to the type of jackpot. The ending designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S340-16).

  After execution of step S340-16, the main CPU 110a determines an end interval time (for example, 2 seconds) according to the type of jackpot, and sets this end interval time in the special game timer counter (S340-17).

  After the execution of step S340-17, or when it is determined that the ending is in progress in step S340-6 (S340-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a determines whether the end interval time has elapsed (S340- 18). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game timer counter set in step S340-17, and determines that the end interval time has elapsed if the special game timer counter is 0, and the special game timer counter is 0. If not, it is determined that the end interval time has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-18: No), the current jackpot game processing ends.

  If the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has elapsed (S340-18: Yes), it sets 4 in the special view special power process data (S340-19), and ends the current jackpot game process. In the special view special power control process after this, the process moves to the jackpot game end process in step S302, and the jackpot game end process is performed.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot game end processing. In FIG. 52, the main CPU 110a loads the stop symbol data set in the stop symbol data storage area in step S311-2 and the game information set in the game state buffer in step S311-4 (S350-1).

  After execution of step S350-1, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game flag setting processing (S350-2). In the high probability game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end setting table in the main ROM 110b, and the high probability at the end of the special game based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1. Determine whether it is necessary to set a game flag.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a special game end setting table. In the special game end setting table, stop symbol data, data indicating the memory contents of the gaming state buffer, data indicating the necessity of the time saving gaming state, data indicating the number of time saving gaming times, data indicating the necessity of the high probability gaming state A set of data indicating the high probability game frequency is stored.

  Specifically, in step S350-1, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-02, 04-06", the high probability gaming flag is set in the high probability gaming flag storage area. If the other is "03, 07", the high probability game flag is not set in the high probability game flag storage area.

  After execution of step S350-2, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game number setting processing (S350-3). In the high probability game state setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end setting table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, counts the number of games at the end of the special game ( X) Determine the remaining fluctuation number (X) to be stored in the storage area.

  Specifically, in step S350-2, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01 to 02, 04 to 06", 10000 times are set in the number of times of game (X) storage area, If it is "03, 07" other than that, 0 times is set to the number-of-games (X) storage area.

  After execution of step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs time-saving game flag setting processing (S350-4). In the time-short game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end setting table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the time short game flag at the end of the special game Determine the need for a set of

  Specifically, in step S350-3, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01 to 07", the time-saving game flag is set in the time-saving game flag storage area.

  After execution of step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs time-saving setting processing (S350-5). In the time reduction setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game end setting table in the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1, the number of games played at the end of the special game (J) The remaining number of fluctuations (J) to be stored in the storage area is determined.

  Specifically, in step S350-4, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01 to 02, 04 to 06", 10000 times are set in the number of times of game (J) storage area If the other is "03, 07", set 100 times in the number of times played (J) storage area.

  After execution of step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines the current gaming state based on the presence / absence of flags set in the high probability gaming flag storage area and the short time gaming flag storage area, and designates the gaming state corresponding to the current gaming state. A command is generated, and this gaming state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S350-6).

  After execution of step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the special view special power process data (S350-7), and ends the jackpot game end process. In special figure special power control processing after this, processing moves to special symbol memory decision processing in step S302, special symbol memory decision processing is done.

  FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing details of the common control routine control process. In FIG. 54, the main CPU 110a loads data for generalization and general processing (S401). In the following step S402, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special view special power process data, and shifts the processing to the normal symbol storage determination process if the general view general power process data = 0, and the general view general processing If data = 1, the processing is shifted to the normal symbol variation processing, if the general drawing general processing data = 2, the processing is transferred to the normal symbol stopping processing, and if the general drawing general processing data = 3, to the auxiliary game processing Transfer the process.

  The outline of the normal symbol storage determination processing, the normal symbol variation processing, the normal symbol stop processing, and the auxiliary game processing is as follows. In the normal symbol storage determination processing (processing for general drawing general processing data = 0), the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the count value (G) of the normal symbol holding number counter is 1 or more. When the count value (G) of the normal symbol holding number counter is 0, the current normal symbol storage determination process is ended. If the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold number counter is 1 or more, after updating the count value (G) of the normal symbol hold number counter by 1 and updating, the second to third in the normal symbol hold storage area The data in the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit is written to the zeroth storage unit. At this time, the normal symbol random number value which has already been written in the 0 th storage portion of the normal symbol storage area is erased. Thereafter, main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol lottery determination table of main ROM 110b, and based on the combination of presence / absence of the flag set in the short time game flag storage area and the normal symbol random number value in the 0th storage portion of the normal symbol storage area. Normal symbol lottery lottery results (perhaps or loses) are determined, and the normal symbol fluctuation time (29 seconds for non-time-saving gaming state, 0.2 seconds for time-saving gaming state) according to this lottery result decide.

  FIG. 43 (b) is a view showing a normal symbol lottery determination table. The normal symbol lottery determination table is stored in the main ROM 110 b of the main control board 110. In the normal symbol lottery determination table, a combination of a normal symbol random number value and a normal symbol lottery result (a hit or a loss) is referred to in the non-time-short game state and in the time-short game state It is stored separately.

  When comparing the number of normal symbol determination random numbers to be hit in non-time short game state in this normal symbol lottery determination table and the number of normal symbol determination random numbers to be hit in time-short game state, the number of wins in non-time short game state The random number value for normal symbol determination is only one (0), whereas the random number value for ordinary symbol determination in the time-saving game state is 65535 (0 to 65,534). The random number range of the normal symbol determination random number value is 0 to 65535. Therefore, the winning probability in the non-time saving gaming state is 1/65536, and the winning probability in the time saving gaming state is 65535/65536 = 1 / 1.00002.

  After the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is determined, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol variation time to the normal symbol time counter and starts the variation of the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 22, and the common pattern commutation process data 1 Set

  In the normal symbol variation processing (processing when the general drawing general processing data = 1), the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (the normal symbol time counter has become 0), and the normal symbol variation If it is determined that the time has not passed, the current symbol variation process is ended. When it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped and displayed with the symbol according to the normal symbol lottery result, and the predetermined normal symbol stop time is set to the normal symbol time counter. Set 2 in the figure general processing data.

  In the normal symbol stop processing (processing when the general drawing general processing data = 2), the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol stop time has elapsed (the normal symbol time counter has become 0), and the normal symbol stop If it is determined that the time has not passed, the current normal symbol stop processing is ended. When it is determined that the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is a hit symbol. When the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is not the symbol of the hit, 0 is set to the common pattern general processing data, and when the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is the symbol of the hit, the common symbol Set 3 to the power processing data.

  In the auxiliary game process (the process when the common view general process data = 3), the main CPU 110a is the open time of the second starting port 15 (0.2 seconds in the non-time game state, if the time game state The second start-up port 15 is opened over this open time, and then the second start-up port 15 is closed, and 0 is set in the generalization general processing data.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing main processing of the effect control board 120 of the gaming machine 1. The main processing is that the system reset has occurred in the sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 from the power supply board 170 by the start operation (normal start operation, RAM clear start operation, first special start operation, or second special start operation). It is started as an opportunity.

  In FIG. 55, the sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process (S1000). In the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of muting a sound, a process of restoring a character, a process of displaying a color bar as a game standby image, and the like. The sub CPU 120a waits for the elapse of a predetermined waiting period while leaving the display image of the image display device 31 as the game standby image (FIG. 57), waits for the display image of the image display device 31 to wait for the customer (left symbol in the stop state) 36L, an image having a middle symbol 36C, and a right symbol 36R). This standby period is at least a time (for example, 8 seconds) longer than the time required from the power-on of the main control board 110 to the end of the initialization process (S10 in FIG. 29). In addition, when the sub CPU 120 a receives a command from the main control board 110 during the standby period, the sub CPU 120 a performs processing according to the received command. Details of the initialization process will be described later.

  When the display image of the image display device 31 becomes an image waiting for a customer after the elapse of the standby period in the initialization process, the player can play a game. After the end of the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a repeats the process (S1100) of updating the effect random number value and the like. Further, in addition to the update process of the random number value, the sub CPU 120a executes the timer interrupt process each time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit. Details of the timer interrupt process will be described later.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing details of the initialization process (step S1000 in FIG. 55). In FIG. 56, the sub CPU 120a permits access to the sub RAM 120c (S1001). Next, the sub CPU 120a performs mute control processing (S1002). In the mute control process, the sub CPU 120 a transmits a mute designation command for muting the output sound of the audio output device 32 to the image control board 150. When the image control board 150 receives the mute designation command, the gain of the sound signal in the image control board 150 is set to zero.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits a character article return designation command to the lamp control board 140 (S1003). When the lamp control board 140 receives the character return specification command, the lamp control board 140 returns the frame effect driving device (frame gimmick) 33a and the board effect driving devices 33b and 33c (board surface gimmick) to their initial positions.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits a background music designation command for outputting background music during activation to the image control board 150 (S1004). When the image control board 150 receives the background music designation command, the gain of the sound signal in the image control board 150 is changed from 0 to the value of the set volume during activation, and the audio output device 32 outputs the background music during activation of the set volume. . The background music during startup is BGM (Back Ground Music) that is played during startup of the gaming machine 1 (during a period from power on to when it becomes possible to play a game).

  Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits a display designation command for displaying the game standby image (color bar image) to the image control board 150 (S1005). When receiving the display designation command, the image control board 150 causes the image display device 31 to display the game standby image. As shown in FIG. 57, the game standby image is an array of rectangular images of colors of different densities.

  In FIG. 56, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the standby period has elapsed (S1006). If the standby period has not elapsed (S1006: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1007. If the standby period has elapsed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1199.

  In step S1007, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not a power on designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the power on designation command has been received (S1007: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1008. If the power on designation command has not been received (S1007: No), the process proceeds to step S1009.

  In step S1008, the sub CPU 120a transmits, to the image control board 150, a display designation command for displaying the characters "power on" on the display image of the image display device 31. Thereafter, the process returns to step S1006. As shown in FIG. 58, when the display control command is received, the image control board 150 displays the characters “power on” in the upper right corner of the game standby image.

  In step S1009, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the RAM clear designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the sub CPU 120a receives the RAM clear designation command (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010. If the RAM clear designation command has not been received (S1009: No), the process proceeds to step S1011.

  In step S1010, the sub CPU 120a stores the initial value of the gaming state information (the gaming state information of the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short gaming state) in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process returns to step S1006.

  In step S1011, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the power supply recovery designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the sub CPU 120a receives the power supply recovery designation command (S1011: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1012. If the power supply recovery designation command has not been received (S1011: No), the process proceeds to step S1014.

  In step S1012, the sub CPU 120a performs gaming state setting processing. In this gaming state setting process, when the command received from the main control board 110 is the power recovery 1 designation command, the sub CPU 120a stores the gaming state information of the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state into the gaming state memory of the sub RAM 120c. Store in the area. When the command received from the main control board 110 is the power recovery 2 designation command, the gaming state information of the low probability gaming state and the short time gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the command received from the main control board 110 is the power recovery 3 designation command, the gaming state information of the high probability gaming state and the non-time-short gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the command received from the main control board 110 is the power recovery 4 designation command, the gaming state information of the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

  Next, the sub CPU 120 a transmits, to the image control board 150, a display designation command for displaying the characters “power restoration” on the display image of the image display device 31 (S 1013). Thereafter, the process returns to step S1006. As shown in FIG. 59, when the display control command is received, the image control board 150 displays the characters “power recovery” in the upper right corner of the game standby image.

  In step S1014, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not a setting change command has been received from the main control board 110. If the sub CPU 120a receives the setting change command (S1014: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1140. If the setting change command has not been received (S1014: No), the process proceeds to step S1015.

  In step S1140, the sub CPU 120a performs setting change notification image display control processing. In the setting change notification image display control process, the sub CPU 120a changes the display image of the image display device 31 from the game standby image to the setting change notification image (FIG. 61), and from the main control board 110 while the setting change notification image is displayed. When a command is received, processing according to the received command is performed. Details of the setting change notification image display control process will be described later.

  In step S1015, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not a setting confirmation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the sub CPU 120a receives the setting confirmation command (S1015: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1150. If the setting confirmation command has not been received (S1015: No), the process returns to step S1006.

  In step S1150, the sub CPU 120a performs setting confirmation notification image display control processing. In the setting confirmation notification image display control process, the sub CPU 120a changes the display image of the image display device 31 from the game standby image to the setting confirmation notification image (FIG. 76), and displays the setting confirmation notification image from the main control board 110 When a command is received, processing according to the received command is performed. Details of the setting confirmation notification image display control process will be described later.

  In step S1199, the sub CPU 120a performs customer waiting state transition processing. In the customer wait state transition process, the sub CPU 120a causes the image display device 31 to display an image (a picture having the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R in the stopped state) displayed in the voice output device 32. Stop background music output during startup. After this, the game of the gaming machine 1 becomes possible.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing details of setting change notification image display control processing (step S1140 in FIG. 56). In the setting change notification image display control process, the sub CPU 120a executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 60 every two milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse in the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120. .

  The sub CPU 120a checks whether the setting change mode flag is set in the setting change mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1141). The setting change mode flag is a flag indicating that it is operating in the setting change mode. If the setting change mode flag is not set (S1141: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1142. If the setting change mode flag is set (S1142: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1144.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designating command of the setting change notification image in the transmission buffer (S1142). This display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process of step S1148. When receiving the display designation command, the image control board 150 causes the image display device 31 to display a setting change notification image. As shown in FIG. 61, the setting change notification image has the characters “setting being changed” arranged at the center of the screen.

  In the next step S1143, sub CPU 120a sets a setting change mode flag in the setting change mode flag storage area of sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1144.

  In step S1144, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. If there is a command in the reception buffer (S1144: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1145. If there is no command in the reception buffer (S1144: No), the process proceeds to step S1148.

  In step S1145, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a special command (a command described as "special command" in FIG. 28). If the command in the reception buffer is a special command (S1145: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1146. If the command in the reception buffer is a game command (S1145: No), the process proceeds to step S1147.

  In step S1146, the sub CPU 120a performs special setting analysis processing during change of setting. The setting change-in-progress special command analysis processing is processing for analyzing a special command in the reception buffer, generating a command corresponding to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. In step S1147, the sub CPU 120a performs game command analysis processing during setting change. The setting change in-progress game command analysis process is a process of analyzing the game command in the reception buffer, generating a command corresponding to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the special command analyzing process during the setting change and the gaming command analyzing process during the setting change will be described later.

  In step S1148, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing. In the data output process, when there is a command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120 c, the sub CPU 120 a transmits the command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the details of the special command analysis process during setting change (step S1146 in FIG. 60). In step S1146-1 of FIG. 62, the sub CPU 120a performs command execution mode determination processing. In this command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command in the reception buffer based on the command execution mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1146-1. In this table, data indicating each type of special command, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary (“o” or “x”), data indicating whether or not deletion of the setting change notification image after receiving the command is necessary Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command in the case of displaying both the setting change notification image and the image corresponding to the command after the reception of the command (“with deletion” or “without deletion”) (“upper right” or Each set of data ("with stop" or "without stop") indicating whether or not to stop the background music after receiving the command is stored. When the sub CPU 120a receives a special command during display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode, the sub CPU 120a determines an execution mode of the command according to the table of FIG. The content of one or both of the display image of the image display device 31 and the output sound of the audio output device 32 is changed on the substrate 150.

  The contents of the record of each special command of the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 63 are the setting change notification regardless of the presence or absence of the background music stop when the special command is received during the display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode. It is intended to maintain the display of the image.

  More specifically, in the record of "Dishintan error command" in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating whether or not the command itself needs to be executed is "O", and the data indicating whether or not the image needs to be erased is "not erased" Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “upper right”, and data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is “no stop”. In the record "Disc full tank error cancellation command", the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is "no deletion", the display position of the image corresponding to the command Indicated data is "-" (no storing of data (the same applies to other "-" because the setting change notification image and the image corresponding to the command are not displayed together)), it is necessary to stop the background music The indicated data is "No stop".

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 64, the image control board 150 displays the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control substrate 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a counter filling error command. Maintain and display a message image corresponding to the error fill-in error command in the upper right corner of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music during start-up is maintained, and the message sound corresponding to the error fill-in error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the countersink error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the countersink error command and the message voice corresponding to the countersink error command. Stop the output of.

  Here, the situation where a command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 while the setting change notification image is being displayed may be when an error occurs at the time of power on of the main control board 110 or the main control board This can happen if an error occurs after powering on 110. In addition, in such a situation, instead of the main control board 110, a debugging dedicated board or a factory shipping board is connected to the effect control board 120, and from the debugging dedicated board or the factory shipping board to the production control board 120 Even when a change start command for testing the behavior of the gaming machine 1 at the start of change, or a magnet detection error command for testing whether an unauthorized It can happen. Also, this may occur when the test personal computer is connected to the external command interface of the effect control board 120, and the test personal computer transmits a command for operation check to the effect control board 120.

  In the “door open error command” record in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating whether or not the command itself needs to be executed is “〇”, the data indicating whether or not the image needs to be erased is “not erased”, the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “center”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is “no stop”. In the "door open error cancellation command" record, the data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is "、", the data indicating whether or not deletion of the image is necessary is "no erasure", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is The data shown is “−”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control substrate 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a door open error command. Then, the message message corresponding to the door open error command is superimposed and displayed on the character of “setting change” in the center of the screen. Further, in this case, the output of background music during start-up is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the door open error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the door open error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the door open error command and outputs the message sound corresponding to the door open error command. Stop.

  In the record of “Magnet detection error command” in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating whether or not the command itself needs to be executed is “、”, the data indicating whether or not the image needs to be erased is “not erased”, the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “center”, and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is “stopped”. In the record of “Magnet detection error cancellation command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”, the display position of the image corresponding to the command The data shown is “−”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 66, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control substrate 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a magnet detection error command. Then, the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command is superimposed and displayed on the character of “setting change” at the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation is stopped, and a message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is a magnet detection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command, and outputs the message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command. Stop.

  In the record of "power on designation command" in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is "、", the data indicating whether or not erasing of the image is necessary is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “upper right”, and the data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is “with stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 67, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control substrate 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the power on designation command. And display a message image corresponding to the power on designation command in the upper right corner of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music is stopped during startup.

  In the record of "power restoration specification command" in the table of FIG. 63, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is "no deletion", the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “upper right”, and the data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is “with stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode is the power supply recovery designation command, as shown in FIG. Keep the display of, and display the message image corresponding to the power recovery specified command in the upper right corner of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music is stopped during startup.

  In step S1146-2 of FIG. 62, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the execution necessity of the command in the reception buffer is “execute” based on the determined contents of the command execution mode determination processing (data of the command execution necessity is It is determined whether or not "o". If the sub CPU 120 a determines that “execution of the command in the reception buffer is required” (S 1146-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120 a proceeds to step S 1146-3. When it is "do not execute" (S1146-2: No), the special command analysis process during the present setting change is ended.

  In step S1146-3, the sub CPU 120a determines, based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process, whether or not the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion". If it is determined that the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion" (S1146-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1146-4. When it is "no deletion" (S1146-3: No), it progresses to step S1146-5.

  In step S1146-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image of the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1146-7. The erasure designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the special command analysis process during setting change this time. When receiving the deletion designation command, the image control board 150 deletes the setting change notification image of the image display device 31.

  Here, in step S1146-4, in place of the deletion designation command for deleting the image, change the display mode of the setting change notification image for preventing the visual recognition of the message image corresponding to the reception command (specifically, Display size of the setting change notification image is reduced, the display position of the setting change notification image is moved to the corner, the transparency of the setting change notification image is increased, and the display color of the setting change notification image is changed. A display mode change specification command may be set to instruct change). FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the change of the content of the image display of the image display device 31 in the modification in which the display mode change finger command is set in step S1146-4. As shown in the example of FIG. 69, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode is a magnet detection error command, the image control substrate 150 displays the size of the setting change notification image. To change the display mode of the image, such as moving it to the lower left corner, to make the display area of the image corresponding to the received command open in the center of the screen.

  In step S1146-5, the sub CPU 120a determines, based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process, whether or not the necessity of the background music stop is "with stop". If the sub CPU 120a determines that the background music needs to be stopped is “with stop” (S1146-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1146-6. When it is "no stop" (S1146-5: No), it progresses to step S1146-7.

  In step S1146-6, the sub CPU 120a sets a background music stop designation command for stopping background music in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1146-7. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the special command analysis process during the setting change this time. When the image control board 150 receives the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops the output of the background music.

  In step S1146-7, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation specification command for causing the image control board 150 to perform processing corresponding to the command in the reception buffer. Specifically, when the command in the reception buffer is an error command, the command to be set in the transmission buffer is a display of the message image corresponding to the error command (for example And the output of a message voice (for example, the output of a warning sound "if it is a full error error if it is a full error command"). If the command in the reception buffer is an error resolution command, the command to be set in the transmission buffer designates deletion of the message image being displayed and stop of the message voice being output. The command set in the transmission buffer in step S1146-7 is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the setting change-in-progress special command analysis process. When receiving the command, the image control board 150 changes the display image of the image display device 31 according to the command, and changes the output sound of the audio output device 32.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the details of the setting change game command analysis process (step S1147 of FIG. 60). In step S1147-1 of FIG. 70, the sub CPU 120a performs command execution mode determination processing. In this command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command in the reception buffer based on the command execution mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1147-1. In this table, data indicating each type of game command, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary (“o” or “x”), data indicating whether or not deletion of the setting change notification image after receiving the command is necessary Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command in the case of displaying both the setting change notification image and the image corresponding to the command after the reception of the command (“with deletion” or “without deletion”) (“upper right” or Each set of data ("with stop" or "without stop") indicating whether or not to stop the background music after receiving the command is stored. When the sub CPU 120a receives a game command during display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode, the sub CPU 120a determines an execution mode of the command according to the table of FIG. 71, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and controls the image. The content of one or both of the display image of the image display device 31 and the output sound of the audio output device 32 is changed on the substrate 150.

  The contents of the record of each game command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 71 are the setting change notification regardless of the presence or absence of the background music stop when the game command is received during the display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode. It erases the image and makes it invisible.

  More specifically, in the record of “variation start command” in the table of FIG. 71, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “erased”, The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 72, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting change notification image is a change start command, the image control substrate 150 displays the setting change notification image in the image display device 31. Is erased, and the symbol variation image corresponding to the variation start command is displayed. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during activation is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the change start command is output.

  In the record of "start winning combination designation command" in the table of FIG. 71, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is required is "x", data indicating whether or not deletion of the image is required is "erased", and an image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “−”, and the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control substrate 120 during display of the setting change notification image is a start winning designation command, The display of the effect image corresponding to the start winning combination designation command is restricted. Further, in this case, the output of background music during start-up is maintained, and the output of the effect sound corresponding to the start winning combination designation command is restricted.

  In the record of "special game start command (opening specification command)" in the table of FIG. 71, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", and the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "erased", The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting change notification image is a special game start command (opening designation command) as shown in FIG. 74, the image display device At 31, the setting change notification image is erased, and a special game start command (opening designation command) and an effect image corresponding to the command are displayed. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation is stopped, and a special game start command (opening designation command) and an effect sound corresponding to the command are output.

  In step S1147-2 of FIG. 70, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the execution necessity of the command in the reception buffer is “execute” based on the determined contents of the command execution mode determination process (the data of the command execution necessity is not It is determined whether or not "o". If the sub CPU 120 a determines that “execution of the command in the reception buffer” is “execute” (S 1147-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S 1147-3. When it is "do not execute" (S1147-2: No), the setting change game command analysis process in progress is ended.

  In step S1147-3, the sub CPU 120a determines, based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination processing, whether or not the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion". If it is determined that the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion" (S1147-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1147-4. When it is "no deletion" (S1147-3: No), it progresses to step S1147-5.

  In step S1147-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image of the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1147-7. The erase designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the present setting change in-progress game command analysis process. When receiving the deletion designation command, the image control board 150 deletes the setting change notification image of the image display device 31.

  Here, in step S1147-4, a display mode for instructing to change the display mode of the setting change notification image for not hindering visual recognition of the message image corresponding to the received command, instead of the deletion designation command for deleting the image. You may set a change specification command.

  In step S1147-5, the sub CPU 120a determines, based on the determination contents of the command execution mode determination process, whether or not the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop". If the sub CPU 120a determines that the background music needs to be stopped is “with stop” (S1147-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1147-6. When it is "no stop" (S1147-5: No), it progresses to step S1147-7.

  In step S1147-6, the sub CPU 120a sets a background music stop designation command for stopping background music in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1147-7. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1148 in FIG. 60) after the setting change-in-progress game command analysis process. When the image control board 150 receives the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops the output of the background music.

  In step S1147-7, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation specification command for causing the image control board 150 to perform processing corresponding to the command in the reception buffer.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing details of setting confirmation notification image display control processing (step S1150 in FIG. 56). In the setting confirmation notification image display control process, the sub CPU 120a executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 75 every two milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse in the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120. .

  The sub CPU 120a confirms whether the setting confirmation mode flag is set in the setting confirmation mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1151). The setting confirmation mode flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation mode is operating. If the setting confirmation mode flag is not set (S1151: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1152. If the setting confirmation mode flag is set (S1152: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1154.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a sets a display specification command of the setting confirmation notification image in the transmission buffer (S1152). This display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process of step S1158. When receiving the display designation command, the image control board 150 causes the image display device 31 to display a setting confirmation notification image. As shown in FIG. 76, the setting confirmation notification image has the letter “setting confirmation in progress” arranged at the center of the screen.

  In the next step S1153, sub CPU 120a sets a setting confirmation mode flag in the setting confirmation mode flag storage area of sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1154.

  In step S1154, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. If there is a command in the reception buffer (S1154: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1155. If there is no command in the reception buffer (S1154: No), the process proceeds to step S1158.

  In step S1155, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a special command (a command described as "special command" in FIG. 28). If the command in the reception buffer is a special command (S1155: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1156. If the command in the reception buffer is a game command (S1155: No), the process proceeds to step S1157.

  In step S1156, the sub CPU 120a performs special command analysis processing during setting confirmation. The special command analysis process during setting confirmation is a process of analyzing a special command in the reception buffer, generating a command according to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. In step S1157, the sub CPU 120a performs game command analysis processing during setting confirmation. The setting confirmation game command analysis process is a process of analyzing the game command in the reception buffer, generating a command according to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the special command analysis process under setting confirmation and the game command analysis process under setting confirmation will be described later.

  In step S1158, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing. In the data output process, when there is a command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120 c, the sub CPU 120 a transmits the command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the details of the special command analysis process (step S1156 in FIG. 75) during setting confirmation. In step S1156-1 of FIG. 77, the sub CPU 120a performs command execution mode determination processing. In this command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command in the reception buffer based on the command execution mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

  FIG. 78 shows a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1156-1. In this table, data indicating each type of special command, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary (“o” or “x”), data indicating whether or not deletion of the setting confirmation notification image after receiving the command is necessary Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command in the case of displaying both the setting confirmation notification image and the image corresponding to the command after receiving the command (“with deletion” or “without deletion”) (“upper right” or Each set of data ("with stop" or "without stop") indicating whether or not to stop the background music after receiving the command is stored. If a special command is received during display of the setting confirmation notification image in the setting confirmation mode, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command according to the table of FIG. 78, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and controls the image The content of one or both of the display image of the image display device 31 and the output sound of the audio output device 32 is changed on the substrate 150.

  The contents of the record of each special command of the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 78 are the setting confirmation notification regardless of the presence or absence of the background music stop when the special command is received during display of the setting confirmation notification image in the setting confirmation mode. It is intended to maintain the display of the image.

  To explain in more detail, in the table of FIG. 78, in the record "Disc full error command", the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", and the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "No deletion" Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “upper right”, and data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is “no stop”. In the record "Disc full tank error cancellation command", the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is "no deletion", the display position of the image corresponding to the command The data shown is “−”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 79, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting confirmation notification image is a counter-full error command, the image control substrate 150 displays the setting confirmation notification image. Maintain and display a message image corresponding to the error fill-in error command in the upper right corner of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music during start-up is maintained, and the message sound corresponding to the error fill-in error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the countersink error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the countersink error command and the message voice corresponding to the countersink error command. Stop the output of.

  In the record of "door open error command" in the table of FIG. 78, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is "、", data indicating whether or not deletion of the image is necessary is "no erasure", and an image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “center”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is “no stop”. In the "door open error cancellation command" record, the data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is "、", the data indicating whether or not deletion of the image is necessary is "no erasure", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is The data shown is “−”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 80, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting confirmation notification image is a door open error command, the image control substrate 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image. Then, a message image corresponding to the door open error command is superimposed and displayed on the character of "setting confirmation" in the center of the screen. Further, in this case, the output of background music during start-up is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the door open error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the door open error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the door open error command and outputs the message sound corresponding to the door open error command. Stop.

  In the record of “Magnet detection error command” in the table of FIG. 78, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “no erasure”, the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “center”, and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is “stopped”. In the record of “Magnet detection error cancellation command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”, the display position of the image corresponding to the command The data shown is “−”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 81, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting confirmation notification image is a magnet detection error command, the image control substrate 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image. Then, the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command is superimposed and displayed on the character "setting confirmation" in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation is stopped, and a message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is a magnet detection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command, and outputs the message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command. Stop.

  In the record of "power on designation command" in the table of FIG. 78, the data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is "〇", the data indicating whether or not erasing of the image is necessary is "no erasure", and the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “upper right”, and the data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is “with stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 82, when the command received while displaying the setting confirmation notification image is a power on designation command, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image, and the screen upper right corner Display the message image corresponding to the power on designation command on. Also, in this case, the output of background music is stopped during startup.

  In the record of "power restoration specification command" in the table of FIG. 78, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is "no deletion", the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “upper right”, and the data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is “with stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 83, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image when the command received by the effect control substrate 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the power restoration designation command. And display a message image corresponding to the power recovery designation command in the upper right corner of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music is stopped during startup.

  In step S1156-2 of FIG. 77, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the execution necessity of the command in the reception buffer is “executed” based on the determined contents of the command execution mode determination process (data of the command execution necessity is not It is determined whether or not "o". If the sub CPU 120 a determines that “execution of the command in the reception buffer is required” (S 1156-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120 a proceeds to step S 1156-3. If it is "do not execute" (S1156-2: No), the special command analysis process during the present setting confirmation is ended.

  In step S1156-3, the sub CPU 120a determines, based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination processing, whether or not the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion". If it is determined that the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion" (S1156-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1156-4. When it is "no deletion" (S1156-3: No), it progresses to step S1156-5.

  In step S1156-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image of the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1156-7. The deletion designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1158 in FIG. 75) after the special command analysis process during the setting confirmation of this time. When receiving the deletion designation command, the image control board 150 deletes the setting confirmation notification image of the image display device 31.

  Here, in step S1156-4, instead of the deletion designation command for deleting the image, the display mode change is instructed to change the display mode of the game standby image so as not to prevent visual recognition of the message image corresponding to the reception command. You may set a specified command.

  In step S1156-5, the sub CPU 120a determines, based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process, whether or not the necessity of the background music stop is "with stop". If it is determined that the background music needs to be stopped is “with stop” (S1156-5: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1156-6. When it is "no stop" (S1156-5: No), it progresses to step S1156-7.

  In step S1156-6, the sub CPU 120a sets a background music stop designation command for stopping background music in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1156-7. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1158 in FIG. 75) after the special command analysis process during the setting confirmation of this time. When the image control board 150 receives the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops the output of the background music.

  In step S1156-7, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation specification command for causing the image control board 150 to perform processing corresponding to the command in the reception buffer.

  FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the details of the setting confirmation game command analysis process (step S1157 in FIG. 75). In step S1157-1 of FIG. 84, the sub CPU 120a performs command execution mode determination processing. In this command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command in the reception buffer based on the command execution mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1157-1. In this table, data indicating each type of game command, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is required (“o” or “x”), data indicating whether or not deletion of the setting confirmation notification image after receiving the command is necessary Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command in the case of displaying both the setting confirmation notification image and the image corresponding to the command after receiving the command (“with deletion” or “without deletion”) (“upper right” or Each set of data ("with stop" or "without stop") indicating whether or not to stop the background music after receiving the command is stored. When the sub CPU 120a receives a game command during display of the setting confirmation notification image in the setting confirmation mode, the sub CPU 120a determines an execution mode of the command according to the table of FIG. 85, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and controls the image. The content of one or both of the display image of the image display device 31 and the output sound of the audio output device 32 is changed on the substrate 150.

  The content of the record of each game command of the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 85 is the setting confirmation notification regardless of the presence or absence of the background music stop when the game command is received during the display of the setting confirmation notification image in the setting confirmation mode. It erases the image and makes it invisible.

  More specifically, in the record of “variation start command” in the table of FIG. 85, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is “o”, and data indicating whether or not erasing of the image is “erased”, The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 86, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting confirmation notification image is a change start command, the image control substrate 150 displays the setting confirmation notification image in the image display device 31. Is erased, and the symbol variation image corresponding to the variation start command is displayed. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during activation is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the change start command is output.

  In the record of "start winning combination designation command" in the table of FIG. 85, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is required is "x", data indicating whether or not deletion of the image is required is "erased", and an image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “−”, and the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 87, the image control board 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image when the command received by the effect control substrate 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the start winning designation command, The display of the effect image corresponding to the start winning combination designation command is restricted. Further, in this case, the output of background music during start-up is maintained, and the output of the effect sound corresponding to the start winning combination designation command is restricted.

  In the record of "special game start command (opening specification command)" in the table of FIG. 85, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased", The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 88, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting confirmation notification image is a special game start command (opening designation command) as shown in FIG. 88, the image display device At 31, the setting confirmation notification image is deleted, and a special game start command (opening designation command) and a corresponding effect image are displayed. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation is stopped, and a special game start command (opening designation command) and an effect sound corresponding to the command are output.

  In step S1157-2 of FIG. 84, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the execution necessity of the command in the reception buffer is “execute” based on the determined contents of the command execution mode determination processing (data of the command execution necessity is It is determined whether or not "o". If the sub CPU 120a determines that the command execution in the reception buffer is “execute” (S1157-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1157-3. When it is "do not execute" (S1157-2: No), the setting confirmation game command analysis process in progress is ended.

  In step S1157-3, the sub CPU 120a determines, based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process, whether or not the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion". If it is determined that the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion" (S1147-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1157-4. When it is "no deletion" (S1147-3: No), it progresses to step S1157-5.

  In step S1157-4, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image of the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1157-7. The erase designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1158 in FIG. 75) after the game command analysis process under setting confirmation. When receiving the deletion designation command, the image control board 150 deletes the setting confirmation notification image of the image display device 31.

  Here, in step S1157-4, a display mode for instructing a change of the display mode of the setting confirmation notification image for not preventing visual recognition of the message image corresponding to the received command, instead of the deletion designation command for deleting the image. You may set a change specification command.

  In step S1157-5, the sub CPU 120a determines, based on the determination contents of the command execution mode determination process, whether or not the necessity of stopping the background music is "with stop". If the sub CPU 120a determines that the background music needs to be stopped is “with stop” (S1157-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1157-6. When it is "no stop" (S1157-5: No), it progresses to step S1157-7.

  In step S1157-6, the sub CPU 120a sets a background music stop designation command for stopping background music in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1157-7. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1158 in FIG. 75) after the game command analysis process during the present setting confirmation. When the image control board 150 receives the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops the output of the background music.

  In step S1157-7, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation designation command for causing the image control board 150 to perform processing corresponding to the command in the reception buffer.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the effect control board 120. The sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 is shown in FIG. 89 every two milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120, after the initialization process is finished and the game is possible. Execute a series of processing.

  In FIG. 89, the sub CPU 120a saves information in the register of the sub CPU 120a in the stack area (S1400).

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs timer update processing (S1500). In the timer update process, the sub CPU 120a updates the various counters by -1 based on the time signal input from the RTC 120d. Details of the timer update process will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs command analysis processing (S1600). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the command in the reception buffer, and based on the analysis result, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive device 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device The content of the effect by 34 is determined, and a command indicating the content of the determined effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the command analysis process will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs effect input control processing (S1700). In the effect input control process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process according to the input signals of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the detection switches 35a, 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d and 39e of the central key 39E. Details of the effect input control process will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing (S1800). In the data output process, the sub CPU 120a transmits the command stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c in the command analysis process of step S1600 and the effect input control process of step S1700 to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S1400 to the register of the sub CPU 120a (S1900).

  90, 91, 92, and 93 are flowcharts showing the details of the command analysis process (step S1600 in FIG. 89). In FIG. 90, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer (S1601). If there is a command in the reception buffer (S1601: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1610. If there is no command in the reception buffer (S1601: No), the current command analysis process is ended.

  In step S1610, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a special symbol holding number specifying command. If the command in the reception buffer is the special symbol holding number designation command (S1610: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1611. If the command in the reception buffer is not the special symbol holding number specifying command (S1610: No), the process proceeds to step 1620.

  In step S1611, the sub CPU 120a performs a special symbol hold number update process. In the special symbol holding number updating process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the special symbol holding number specifying command to determine the number of displayed holding images 37 to be displayed on the image display device 31, and the number of displayed holding images 37 The corresponding special-image display number specification command is set in the transmission buffer.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special symbol holding number update process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the effects relating to the appearance or deletion of the hold display image 37 in the image display device 31 are displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive device 33a. , 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device 34.

  In step S1620, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a start winning combination designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the start winning combination designation command (S1620: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1621. If the command in the reception buffer is not the start winning combination designation command (S1620: No), the process proceeds to step S1630.

  In step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs a start winning combination designation command storage process. In the start winning designated command storing process, the sub CPU 120a selects one of the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area of the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 120c that corresponds to the start winning specified command in the reception buffer. The storage unit with no data stored in the first to fourth storage units of the selected effect information storage area and having the smallest number is the storage destination of data, and the start winning designation command in the reception buffer is the storage unit of the data storage destination Remember to

  FIG. 38C shows the effect information storage area. As shown in FIG. 38 (c), the effect information storage area is the 0th storage unit corresponding to the variation, the first effect information storage area corresponding to the suspension of the first special symbol, and the suspension of the second special symbol It has a corresponding second effect information storage area. Each of the first effect information storage area and the second effect information storage area is a first storage unit corresponding to the first hold, a second storage unit corresponding to the second hold, and a third storage unit corresponding to the third hold, And a fourth storage unit corresponding to the fourth hold. As shown in FIG. 38 (d), each storage unit in the effect information storage area can store start prize designation commands, prefetch effect effect scenario data, and stage data of a new stage after change in stage change. It has become.

  In FIG. 90, after execution of step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs pre-reading effect effect selection processing (S1622). In the pre-reading effect effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a performs pre-reading effect effect that the variation of the symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination designation command is the final variation for the starting winning combination designation command stored in the effect information storage area in step S1621 (FIG. 22) If it is necessary to determine whether it is necessary to execute the pre-read effect effect, the scenario of the pre-read effect effect up to the final change is determined, and the pre-read effect effect scenario data indicating this scenario is included in the effect information storage area Store in the storage unit of Details of the pre-reading effect effect selection processing will be described later.

  After execution of step S1622, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change determination processing (S1622). In the stage change determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute a stage change, and when performing a stage change, which of the change or the change within the pending period of the starting winning point is to be performed. Performs a preparation process to make a stage change in the determined and determined fluctuation. Details of the stage change determination process will be described later.

  In step S1624, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the stage change determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. If the determination result is "execute" (S1624: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1625. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1624: No), the command analysis process of this time is ended.

  In step S1625, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change preview effect selection processing. In the stage change notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to execute the stage change notice effect, and when performing the stage change notice effect, the stage change notice effect is performed at any timing before the stage change. At the determined timing, a preparation process is performed to execute the stage change advance presentation effect. Details of the stage change determination process will be described later.

  In step S1630, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a symbol designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a symbol designation command (S1630: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631. If the command in the reception buffer is not a symbol designation command (S1630: No), the process proceeds to step S1640.

  In step S1631, the sub CPU 120a performs rendering symbol determination processing, and ends the current command analysis processing after performing the rendering symbol determination processing. In the effect symbol determination process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the symbol designation command and determines the stop symbol numbers of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z, and the determined stop symbol number is sub A stop symbol designating command for storing the stop symbol number in the effect symbol storage area in the RAM 120c and notifying the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 of the stop symbol number is generated, and the generated stop pattern designating command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the effect symbol determination process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the effect pattern determination process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 determine the symbol combination at the time of the fluctuation stop in the fluctuation.

  In step S1640, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a fluctuation start command. If the command in the reception buffer is a change start command (S1640: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1641. If the command in the reception buffer is not a change start command (S1640: No), the process proceeds to step S1670.

  In step S1641, the sub CPU 120a performs storage area shift processing. In the storage area shift process, when data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the second effect information storage area, the sub CPU 120a stores the second to fourth storages of the second effect information storage area. The data in the unit is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit of the second effect information storage area is written to the zeroth storage unit. By the writing of the data into the 0th storage unit, the data (start winning combination designation command, prefetch effect presentation scenario data, stage data) which have been stored in the 0th storage unit until then are erased. When data is not stored in the second effect information storage area and data is stored in one or more of the first to fourth storage units of the first effect information storage area, the first of the first effect information storage area The data in the second to fourth storage units is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit of the first effect information storage area is written to the zeroth storage unit. By the writing of the data to the zeroth storage unit, the data stored in the zeroth storage unit is erased.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not pre-reading effect presentation scenario data is stored in the presentation information storage area (S1642). The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1643 if prefetch effect effect scenario data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1642: Yes). If prefetch effect presentation scenario data is not stored in the presentation information storage area (S1642: No), the process proceeds to step S1646.

  In step S1643, the sub CPU 120a performs pre-reading effect control processing. In the pre-reading effect control process, the sub CPU 120a refers to pre-reading effect effect scenario data in the effect information storage area, determines the necessity of execution of pre-reading effect effect in the variation, and executes the pre-reading effect effect in the variation Generates an effect pattern designating command of the pre-reading effect effect, and sets the generated effect pattern designating command in the transmission buffer.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the pre-reading effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the effect pattern designating command of the pre-reading effect effect, the pre-reading effect effect for the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and for effect The lighting device 34 is made to execute.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a determines whether stage data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1644). If stage data is stored in the effect information storage area (S1644: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1645. If stage data is not stored in the zeroth storage portion of the effect information storage area (S1644: No), the process proceeds to step S1646.

  In step S1645, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change control processing. In the stage change control process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the stage data in the effect information storage area, and performs stage change in the case where the stage data is stored in the 0th storage section of the effect information storage area. Is determined, a rendering pattern designation command for instructing a stage change to the stage indicated by the stage data in the zeroth storage unit is generated, and this rendering pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the stage change control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the effect pattern designating command of the stage change, according to the command, the stage change is performed by the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect driver 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect It makes the lighting device 34 execute.

  In step S1646, the sub CPU 120a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. The change effect pattern determination process is a process of determining a symbol change effect pattern which is a flow of effects related to the behavior of the effect pattern 36 and the movable role objects 330a, 330b, 330c in the change. In the fluctuation effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 1 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the variation effect pattern determination table of the sub ROM 120b, determines the symbol variation effect pattern based on the combination of the variation start command in the reception buffer and the effect random number 1, and determines the symbol variation effect pattern Is stored in the symbol variation effect pattern storage area in the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command of the determined symbol variation effect pattern, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a variation presentation pattern determination table. In the change effect pattern determination table, a set of effect random number value 1, a symbol change effect pattern, and an effect pattern specification command is stored for each corresponding to the change start command.

  For example, for the option of the symbol variation presentation pattern corresponding to the variation start command (per 16R probability variation, variation time T1) in which the MODE data is "E6H" and the DATA data is "11H" There are 112, a symbol variation effect pattern 113, a symbol variation effect pattern 114 and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 111 is: speech operation effect → lost reach effect (reach effect → a series of effects called temporary stop in a lost mode) → SP reach effect → big hit notification effect (per 16R). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 112 is: speech operation effect → lost reach effect → battle effect (battle success) → big hit notification effect (per 16R). The flow of the effect of the pattern variation effect pattern 13 is as follows: loss reach effect → battle effect (battle failure) → surprise operation effect → big hit notification effect (per 16R). The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 14 is: loss reach effect → SP reach effect → effect to temporarily stop in a hit mode → re-lottery effect → big hit notification effect (per 16R).

  The options for the symbol variation presentation pattern corresponding to the variation data start command (16R probability variation, variation time T2) with MODE data “E6H” and DATA data “12H” are the symbol variation presentation pattern 121, the symbol variation presentation pattern 122, There is a pattern variation presentation pattern 123 and the like. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 121 is: speech operation effect → lost reach effect → SP reach effect → SPSP reach effect → big hit notification effect (per 16R). The flow of the effect of the pattern variation effect pattern 122 is: speech operation effect → loss reach effect → SP reach effect → SPSP reach effect → effect to temporarily stop in hitting mode → re-lottery effect → big hit notification effect (per 16R) . The flow of the effects of the pattern variation effect pattern 123 is: loss reach effect → SP reach effect → SPSP reach effect → speech operation effect → effect to temporarily stop in hitting mode → re-lottery effect → big hit notification effect (per 16R) .

  There is a symbol variation presentation pattern 141 as an option of the symbol variation presentation pattern corresponding to the variation start command (per 2R probability variation, variation time T3) in which the MODE data is “E6H” and the DATA data is “41H”. The flow of the production of the pattern variation production pattern 141 is: lost reach production → dark production → second movable role tilting production → chance range production → first movable role falling production → challenge success production → big hit notification production (per 2R) It has become.

  The options for the symbol variation presentation pattern corresponding to the variation data start command (loss, variation time T1) with MODE data “E6H” and DATA data “01H” include symbol variation presentation pattern 011, symbol variation presentation pattern 012, etc. . The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 011 is as follows: operation operation effect → loss reach effect → SP reach effect → loss notification effect. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 012 is: speech operation effect → lost reach effect → battle effect (battle failure) → lost notification effect.

  There is a symbol variation presentation pattern 014 as an option of the symbol variation presentation pattern corresponding to the variation start command (loss, variation time T3) of MODE data “E6H” and DATA data “03H”. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 014 is as follows: loss reach effect → dark effect → second movable role tilting effect → challenge effect → chance range failure effect → loss notification effect.

  There is a symbol variation presentation pattern 017 as an option of the symbol variation presentation pattern corresponding to the variation start command (loss, variation time T10 (shortened variation)) in which the MODE data is “E6H” and the DATA data is “10H”. The flow of the effect of the symbol variation effect pattern 017 is as follows: shortening fluctuation effect → loss notification effect.

  Here, among the symbol variation effect patterns in the variation effect pattern determination table (FIG. 94), those which execute serif operation effects immediately after the start of symbol variation (pattern variation effect patterns 111, 112, 121, 122, 011 , 012, etc.) and those which execute speech operation effects after reaching the reach (pattern fluctuation effect patterns 114, 123, etc.). With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 enables execution of the speech operation effect immediately after the start of fluctuation of the symbol, and also enables execution of the speech operation effect after the reach is established.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the variation presentation pattern determination process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect perform a series of effects according to the command from the start to the end of the fluctuation time T of the fluctuation. This is performed by the driving devices 33a, 33b and 33c and the lighting device 34 for effect.

  In step S1647 of FIG. 91, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation presentation pattern determined in the variation presentation pattern determination process includes SP reach presentation. If the sub CPU 120a includes the SP reach effect (S1647: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1648. If the SP reach effect is not included (S1647: No), the process proceeds to step S1649.

  In step S1648, the sub CPU 120a performs SP-specific notice effect selection processing. In the SP specific advance notice effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines the necessity of the execution of the SP specified advance notice effect (FIG. 13C), and executes the SP specified advance notice effect when executing the SP specified advance notice effect. It determines and produces the production | presentation pattern designation | designated command which instruct | indicates execution of SP specific notice production | presentation at this timing, and sets the produced | generated production | generation pattern designation | designated command in a transmission buffer. Details of the SP specific advance notice effect selection process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the SP-specific advance notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, according to the command, the SP specific advance notice effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device Run on 34

  In step S1649, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation presentation pattern determined in the variation presentation pattern determination process includes SPSP reach presentation. If the sub CPU 120a includes the SPSP reach effect (S1649: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1650. If the SPSP reach effect is not included (S1649: No), the process proceeds to step S1651.

  In step S1650, sub CPU 120a performs SPSP specific notice effect selection processing. In the SPSP specific advance notice effect selection processing, the sub CPU 120a determines the necessity of execution of the SPSP specific advance notice effect (FIG. 13D), and executes the SPSP specific advance notice effect when executing the SPSP specific advance notice effect. The effect pattern designating command for instructing execution of the SPSP specific advance notice effect at this timing is generated, and the generated effect pattern designating command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the SPSP specific advance notice effect selection process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the SPSP-specific advance notice effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the SPSP specific advance notice effect is displayed according to the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive device 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device Run on 34

  In step S1651, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation presentation pattern determined in the variation presentation pattern determination process includes a speech operation presentation. If the sub CPU 120a includes a speech operation effect (S1651: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1652. If the speech operation effect is not included (S1651: No), the process proceeds to step S1656.

  In step S1652, the sub CPU 120a performs speech operation effect operation result determination processing. In the speech operation effect operation result determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the speech person and the speech as the operation result of the speech operation effect, generates the production pattern specification command of the speech operation effect according to the determination, and specifies the generated production pattern Set command in send buffer. The details of the speech operation effect operation result determination process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the speech operation presentation operation result determination process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800.

  In step S1653, sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time of the operation acceptance effective period of the speech operation effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, as a serif of sub RAM 120 c. Set in the operation reception effective period start timer counter for operation effects. Further, sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time of the operation acceptance effective period of the speech operation effect, divides this time by 2 milliseconds, and the operation acceptance effective period end timer counter for the speech operation effect of sub RAM 120c. Set to The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter and the operation acceptance valid period finish timer counter are counted down each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period, and the operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation reception valid period.

  In step S1654, the sub CPU 120a sets a speech operation effect operation result waiting flag in the speech operation effect operation result waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1655. The speech operation effect operation result waiting flag is a flag indicating that execution of an effect causing the speech in the speech operation effect is awaited.

  In step S1655, the sub CPU 120a performs speech operation specific notice presentation selection processing. In the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection processing, the sub CPU 120a determines the necessity of execution of the dialogue operation specific advance announcement effect (FIG. 16 (d)), and executes the dialogue operation specific advance announcement effect. The execution timing of is determined, an effect pattern designating command for instructing the execution of the effect at this timing is generated, and the generated effect pattern designating command is set in the transmission buffer. The details of the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process will be described later.

  The commands set in the transmission buffer in the speech operation presentation operation result determination process and the speech operation specific advance presentation effect selection process are transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, according to the command, the speech operation effect or the speech operation specific advance notice effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect driving device 33a, 33b, 33c, And the lighting device 34 for effect.

  In step S1656, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation presentation pattern determined in the variation presentation pattern determination process includes a challenge presentation. If the sub CPU 120a includes a challenge effect (S1656: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1657. If the challenge effect is not included (S1656: No), the process proceeds to step S1661.

  In step S1657, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the challenge effect is a challenge failure or a challenge success. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1658 if the challenge effect is to be a challenge success (S1657: No). If the challenge effect is a challenge failure (S1657: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1661.

  In step S1658, sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time of the operation reception effective period of the challenge effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse, to produce the challenge effect of sub RAM 120c. Set in the operation reception valid period start timer counter for Further, sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time of the operation reception effective period of the challenge effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to set the operation reception effective period end timer counter for the challenge effect of sub RAM 120c. Do. The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter and the operation acceptance valid period finish timer counter are counted down each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period, and the operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation reception valid period.

  In step S1659, the sub CPU 120a sets a challenge effect (success) wait flag in the challenge effect (success) wait flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1660. The challenge effect (success) standby flag is a flag indicating that execution of a challenge success effect is awaited.

  In step S1660, sub CPU 120a sets a first bonus drop waiting flag in the first bonus drop waiting flag storage area of sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1661. The first operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the first movable role product 330a is waiting for the effect to be lowered.

  In step S1661, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation presentation pattern determined in the variation presentation pattern determination process includes a surprise operation presentation. If the sub CPU 120a includes a surprise operation effect (S1661: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1662. If the surprise operation effect is not included (S1661: No), the process proceeds to step S1665.

  In step S1662, sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time of the operation acceptance valid period of the surprise operation effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse to surprise sub RAM 120c. Set in the operation reception effective period start timer counter for operation effects. Further, sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time of the operation acceptance effective period of the surprise operation effect, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain the operation acceptance effective period end timer counter for the surprise operation effect of sub RAM 120c. Set to The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter and the operation acceptance valid period finish timer counter are counted down each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The operation reception valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation reception valid period, and the operation reception valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation reception valid period.

  In step S1663, the sub CPU 120a sets a surprise operation effect waiting flag in the surprise operation effect waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1664. The surprise operation effect standby flag is a flag indicating that the execution of the surprise operation effect is awaited.

  In step S1664, the sub CPU 120a sets a first bonus drop waiting flag in the first bonus drop waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1665.

  In step S1665 of FIG. 92, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the symbol variation presentation pattern determined in the variation presentation pattern determination process includes a shortening variation presentation. If the sub CPU 120a includes a shortening variation effect (S1665: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1666. If the shortening variation effect is not included (S1665: No), the process proceeds to step S1667.

  In step S1666, the sub CPU 120a performs a shortening fluctuation advance presentation selection process. In the shortening fluctuation advance notice selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines the necessity of execution of the shortening fluctuation notice effect (FIG. 19 (b)), and executes the shortening fluctuation notice effect when executing the shortening fluctuation notice effect. It determines and produces the production | presentation pattern designation | designated command which instruct | indicates execution of the production | presentation at this timing, and sets the produced | generated production | generation pattern designation | designated command to a transmission buffer. The details of the shortening variation advance presentation effect selection process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the shortened variation advance presentation effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, according to the command, the shortened fluctuation advance presentation effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device Run on 34

  In step S1668, the sub CPU 120a performs mode effect control processing. In the mode effect control process, if the sub CPU 120a is executing the special training mode, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not to end the special training mode in the variation, and ends the special training mode effect when the special training mode effect is ended. The effect pattern specification command is generated, and the generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the mode effect control process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the mode effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, according to the command, the corresponding effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device 34. Make it run.

  In step S1669, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change notice production control processing during symbol fluctuation. In the symbol change stage change notice effect control process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not stage change notice effect is to be performed immediately after the start of the current change display or immediately before the stop. If the sub CPU 120a is to execute stage change advance notice effects immediately after the start of the variable display, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command for stage change advance effect effects, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. . If the sub CPU 120a is to execute the stage change notice effect immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display, the sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the timing immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to obtain a value. It is set in the timer counter immediately before the fluctuation stop of the sub RAM 120c. The timer counter immediately before the fluctuation stop is counted down each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed, and becomes 0 at the timing immediately before the fluctuation display is stopped.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the stage-change notice production control process during symbol variation is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the stage change notice effect according to the command is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device Run on 34

  In step S1670 in FIG. 93, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a fluctuation stop command. If the command in the reception buffer is the variable stop command (S1670: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1671. If the command in the reception buffer is not the fluctuation stop command (S1670: No), the process proceeds to step S1680.

  In step S1671, the sub CPU 120a performs effect symbol stop processing. In the effect symbol stopping process, the sub CPU 120a generates a stop designating command for stopping the effect symbol 36, and sets the generated stop designating command in the transmission buffer. The details of the effect pattern stop process will be described later.

  The stop designation command set in the transmission buffer in the effect symbol stop process is sent to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect driving devices 33a, 33b, and 33c, and the effects related to the stopping of the rendering pattern 36 according to the command. It is performed by the effect lighting device 34.

  In step S1672, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change notice effect control processing while the symbol is stopped. During the symbol stop stage change notice effect control process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether a stage change is to be performed immediately after the current fluctuation display stops. If the sub CPU 120a is to change the stage immediately after the change display is stopped, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command of the stage change advance presentation effect, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the stage change advance notice effect control process during symbol stopping is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, the stage change notice effect according to the command is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device Run on 34

  In step S1680, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command (S1680: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1681. If the command in the reception buffer is not the gaming state designation command (S1680: No), the process proceeds to step S1690.

  In step S1681, the sub CPU 120a performs gaming state setting processing. In the gaming state setting process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the gaming state designation command in the reception buffer to obtain the current gaming state, and stores gaming state information indicating the obtained gaming state in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. .

  In step S1690, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an opening designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the opening designation command (S1690: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1691. If the command in the reception buffer is not the opening designation command (S1690: No), the process proceeds to step S1692.

  In step S1691, the sub CPU 120a performs special game effect selection processing. In the special game effect selection process, the sub CPU 120a determines an opening effect pattern based on the opening designation command in the reception buffer, and stores information on the determined opening effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a executes the rank-up effect (FIG. 21 (a), FIG. 21 (b)) in the fourth round when the opening designation command is for 8R probability variation or 8R normal variation, Rank-up effect execution data indicating the content of the rank-up effect is stored in the per-round effect information storage area of the fourth round of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the special game effect selection process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game effect selection process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, according to the command, the opening effect of the special game is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting It causes the device 34 to execute.

  At step S1692, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a round start command. If the command in the reception buffer is a round start command (S1692: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693. If the command in the reception buffer is not a round start command (S1692: No), the process proceeds to step S1694.

  In step S1693, the sub CPU 120a performs round effect control processing. In the round effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the round start command in the reception buffer and determines whether the current round is an execution round of rank up effect (per 8R probability variation or 4th round per 8R normal) Determine The sub CPU 120a determines the effect pattern of the current round based on the determination result, stores the information of the determined effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and generates the effect pattern specification command of this effect pattern , The generated effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the round effect control process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the round effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, according to the command, the round effect of the special game is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect driver 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting It causes the device 34 to execute.

  In step S1694, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the command in the reception buffer is an ending specification command. If the command in the reception buffer is the ending designation command (S1694: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1695. If the command in the reception buffer is not the ending designation command (S1694: No), the current command analysis processing is ended.

  In step S1695, the sub CPU 120a performs special game end effect control processing, and proceeds to step S1696. In the special game end effect control process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the ending designation command in the reception buffer to determine an ending effect pattern, and stores information of the determined effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command of the determined effect pattern, and sets this effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. Also, if there is a flag that has been set during the special game, the sub CPU 120a clears them.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special game end effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, according to the command, the special game ending effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect lighting It causes the device 34 to execute.

  In step S1696, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the jackpot that triggered the execution of the finished special game is a normal hit or a positive change. If the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game is a normal hit (S1696: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1697. If the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game is a probability change hit (S1696: No), the process proceeds to step S1698.

  In step S1697, the sub CPU 120a performs a training mode start control process. In the special training mode start control process, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern specification command of the special training mode in the transmission buffer. Details of the special training mode start control process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the special training mode start control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, according to the command, according to the command, the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive device 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device Run on 34

  In step S1698, the sub CPU 120a performs live mode start control processing. In the live mode start control process, the sub CPU 120a sets a rendering pattern designation command of the live mode in the transmission buffer. Details of the live mode start control process will be described later.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the live mode start control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1800. When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive this command, according to the command, according to the command, the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device Run on 34

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing details of the pre-reading effect effect selection processing (step S1622 in FIG. 90). In FIG. 95, the sub CPU 120a sets the hold corresponding to the storage unit in the effect information storage area storing the start winning specification command in the start winning specification command storage processing as the prefetch determination target hold, and the variation of this prefetch determination target hold develops It is determined whether it is a fluctuation having an effect (S1622-1). If the sub CPU 120a is a change having a development effect (S1622-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-2. If it is not a change having a development effect (S1622-1: No), the pre-reading effect effect selection process of this time is ended.

  In step S1622-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not there is a change having a development effect within the hold precedent to that of the pre-reading determination target hold. If there is no change having a development effect (S1622-2: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-3. If there is a change having a development effect (S1622-2: Yes), the pre-reading effect effect selection process of this time is ended.

  In step S1622-3, the sub CPU 120a performs pre-reading effect effect execution determination processing. In the pre-reading effect effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 2 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the prefetch effect effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and prefetches the combination based on the predetermination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the start prize designation command of prefetch determination target suspension and the random number 2 for effect. It is determined whether it is necessary to execute an effect effect.

  FIG. 96A is a diagram showing a pre-reading effect effect execution determination table. A combination of data indicating effect random number 2 and necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) in the prefetch effect effect execution judgment table is the same as the one referred to when the preliminary judgment result is a big hit Are stored separately in what you refer to. Specifically, for the jackpot, 60 (0 to 59) effect random number values 2 are associated with data indicating that the prefetch effect effect is to be executed, and 40 (60 to 99) for effect The random number 2 is associated with data indicating that the prefetch effect effect is not performed. As for the loss, forty (0 to 39) effect random number values 2 are associated with the data indicating that the pre-reading effect effect is to be executed, and 60 (40 to 99) effect random number values 2 are pre-read It is associated with data indicating that no effect presentation is to be performed.

  In step S1622-4, the sub CPU 120a confirms which of “execute” and “do not execute” the determination result of the prefetch effect effect execution determination process. If the determination result is “execute” (S1622-4: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1622-5. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1622-4: No), the pre-reading effect effect selection process of this time is ended.

  In step S1622-5, the sub CPU 120a performs pre-reading effect final stage determination processing. In the pre-reading effect final stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 3 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the final stage effect display mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the combination of the predetermination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the start winning designation command of pre-reading determination target suspension and random number 3 for effect, The display mode of the pending display image 37 at the final stage of the effect of the pre-reading effect is determined.

  FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing a final stage effect display mode determination table. In the final stage effect display mode decision table, a set of data indicating effect random number 3 and final stage effects (“blue”, “green” and “red”) is referred to when the pre-judgment result is a jackpot It is divided and stored as what you refer to when you lose it. Specifically, for the jackpot, 10 (0 to 9) effect random number values 3 are associated with the data indicating "blue effect", and 30 (10 to 39) effect random number values 3 Is associated with data indicating “green effect”, and 60 (40 to 99) effect random number values 3 are associated with data indicating “red effect”. As for the loss, 60 (0 to 59) effect random number values 3 are associated with the data indicating "blue effect", and 30 (60 to 89) effect random number values 3 are "green effect" And ten (90 to 99) effect random number values 3 are associated with data indicating "red effect".

  In step S1622-6, the sub CPU 120a performs a prefetch effect presentation scenario determination process. In the pre-reading effect effect scenario determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number 4 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the prefetch effect effect scenario determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and indicates the preliminary determination result (big hit or loss) indicated by the start winning designation command of the prefetch determination target hold, the final stage effect, the number of reservations, and the random number for effect Based on the combination of 4, the pre-read effect presentation scenario is determined.

  There are two types of pre-reading effect presentation scenario determination tables, one referred to when the pre-judgment result is a big hit, and one referred to when lost. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a prefetch effect presentation scenario determination table which is referred to in the case where the preliminary determination result is a big hit. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a prefetch effect presentation scenario determination table which is referred to in the case where the preliminary determination result is a loss.

  In the pre-reading effect presentation scenario determination table, a combination of effect random number 4 and pre-reading effect presentation scenario data is stored for each corresponding to the combination of the final stage effect of pre-reading effect presentation and the number of reservations. In the jackpot effect presentation scenario determination table (FIG. 97) and the loss presentation effect presentation scenario determination table (FIG. 98), the presentation random effects 4 for presentation scenario ER39 and ER49 for the presentation effect presentation called "falling down" The assignment is different.

  More specifically, in this table, there is a prefetch effect presentation scenario EB11 as an option corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of reservations. The look-ahead effect presentation scenario EB11 is a scenario in which a blue effect appears in a final change. One hundred (0 to 99) effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario EB11. The options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of reservations are the prefetch effect presentation scenarios EB21 and EB22. The prefetch effect presentation scenarios EB21 and EB22 are scenarios in which the blue effect appears at different times. Seventy (0 to 69) effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario EB21, and thirty (70 to 99) effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario EB22. .

  The options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of reservations are the prefetch effect presentation scenarios EB31, EB32, and EB33. The prefetch effect presentation scenarios EB31, EB32, and EB33 are scenarios in which the blue effect appears at different times. Twenty to fifty effect random number values for effect 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenarios EB31, EB32, and EB33, respectively. The options corresponding to the combination of blue and the number of reservations are the prefetch effect presentation scenarios EB41, EB42, EB43, and EB44. The prefetch effect presentation scenarios EB41, EB42, EB43, and EB44 are scenarios in which the time at which the blue effect appears is different. Ten to forty random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenarios EB41, EB42, EB43, and EB44, respectively.

  An option corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations is the prefetch effect presentation scenario EG11. The look-ahead effect presentation scenario EG11 is a scenario in which a green effect appears in the final change. One hundred (0 to 99) effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario EG11. The options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations are the prefetch effect presentation scenarios EG21 and EG22. The look-ahead effect presentation scenarios EG21 and EG22 are scenarios in which the time at which the green effect appears and the presence or absence of the appearance of the blue effect before that point are different. Seventy (0 to 69) effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario EG21, and thirty (70 to 99) effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario EG22. .

  The options corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations are the prefetch effect presentation scenarios EG31 to EG38. The look-ahead effect presentation scenarios EG31 to EG38 are scenarios in which the time at which the green effect appears and the presence or absence of the appearance of the blue effect before that time are different. Five to twenty effect random number values for effect 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenarios EG31 to EG38, respectively. An option corresponding to the combination of green and the number of reservations is the prefetch effect presentation scenario EG41 to EG48. The look-ahead effect presentation scenario EG41 to EG48 are scenarios in which the time at which the green effect appears and the presence or absence of the appearance of the blue effect before that time are different. Five to twenty effect random number values for effect 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario EG41 to EG48, respectively.

  As an option corresponding to the combination of red and the number of reservations, there is a prefetch effect presentation scenario ER11. The look-ahead effect presentation scenario ER11 is a scenario in which a red effect appears in the final change. One hundred (0 to 99) effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario ER11. The options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of reservations are the prefetch effect presentation scenarios ER21, ER22, ER23, and ER24. The look-ahead effect presentation scenarios ER21, ER22, ER23, and ER24 are scenarios in which the time at which the red effect appears and the presence or absence of the appearance of the blue effect and the green effect before that point are different. Ten to forty pieces of effect random number values 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenarios ER21, ER22, ER23, and ER24, respectively.

  The options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of reservations are the prefetch effect presentation scenarios ER31 to ER39. The look-ahead effect presentation scenarios ER31 to ER39 are scenarios in which the time at which the red effect appears and the presence or absence of the appearance of the blue effect and the green effect before that time are different. Here, the preread effect effect scenario ER31 to ER38 is a scenario of "up" that a color effect having a higher reliability than that of the previous variation appears in the later variation, such as blue → green → red. On the other hand, the look-ahead effect rendering scenario ER39 is a “falling” scenario in which an effect of a color that is less reliable than that of the previous variation appears in the later variation, such as green → red → green. In the jackpot table (FIG. 97), 5 to 20 effect random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario ER31 to ER38, and one (99) effect random for presentation effect in the prefetch effect effect scenario ER39. The number 4 is associated. On the other hand, in the loss table (FIG. 98), 5 to 20 effect random number values for effect 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenarios ER31 to ER38. Further, in the loss table, no effect random number 4 is associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario ER39.

  The options corresponding to the combination of red and the number of reservations are the prefetch effect presentation scenarios ER41 to ER49. The look-ahead effect presentation scenarios ER41 to ER49 are scenarios in which the time at which the red effect appears and the presence or absence of the appearance of the blue effect and the green effect before that point are different. Among the prefetch effect presentation scenarios ER41 to ER49, the prefetch effect presentation scenarios ER41 to 48 are scenarios of "up", and the prefetch effect presentation scenario ER49 are scenarios of "down". In the jackpot table (FIG. 97), 5 to 20 effect random numbers 4 for effect are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario ER41 to ER 48, and one (99) effect random for presentation effect in the prefetch effect effect scenario ER49. The number 4 is associated. On the other hand, in the loss table (FIG. 98), 5 to 20 effect random number values for effect 4 are associated with the prefetch effect effect scenarios ER41 to ER48. Further, in the loss table, no effect random number 4 is associated with the prefetch effect effect scenario ER49.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1, for the combination of red and 3 with hold number and the combination of red and 4 with hold number, "previous" pre-read effect presentation scenario ER39 and ER49 can be selected only from the jackpot table. It has become. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1, the pre-reading effect effect of "falling" is the final change jackpot finalization effect (effect of notifying that the final change will be a big hit before the symbol stop of the final change).

  In step S1622-7 in FIG. 95, the sub CPU 120a stores scenario data of the prefetch effect effect scenario determined in the prefetch effect effect scenario determination process in the storage unit in the effect information storage area.

  Here, in the prefetch effect effect selection process, if there is a development effect in the prefetch determination target pending and there is no development effect in the previous pending in the change order (S1622-1: Yes → S1622-2: No), the prefetch An effect presentation execution determination process is performed. By such processing flow, when the effect control board 120 executes the prefetch effect effect, the evolution control effect is executed as the effect during the fluctuation display of the final change of the prefetch effect effect, and the final change of the prefetch effect effect It regulates that the development effect is executed as the effect during the variable display before the above.

  FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing details of rendering symbol determination processing (step S1631 in FIG. 90). In FIG. 99, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the variation is stopped with a jackpot symbol (S1631-1). The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631-2 when the variation stops at the jackpot symbol (S1631-1: Yes). When the said change does not stop by the symbol of a big hit (S1631-1: No), it progresses to step S1631-3.

  In step S1631-2, the sub CPU 120a selects the symbol combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z from among those corresponding to the types of jackpots won, and in the symbol combination selected The four stop symbol numbers of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined.

  In step S1631-3, the sub CPU 120a selects the symbol combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z from among those corresponding to losing and selects the left symbol 36L in the selected symbol combination, The four stop symbol numbers of the middle symbol 36C, the right symbol 36R, and the fourth symbol 36Z are determined.

  In step S1631-4, the sub CPU 120a stores the determined four stop symbol numbers in the effect symbol storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

  In step S1631-5, sub CPU 120a generates a stop symbol specification command for notifying the determined four stop symbol numbers, and sets the generated stop symbol specification command in the transmission buffer.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the details of the SP-specific advance notice effect selection process (step S1648 in FIG. 90). In FIG. 100, the sub CPU 120a performs SP specific advance notice effect execution determination processing (S1648-1). In the SP-specific advance notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 5 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the SP specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the necessity of execution of the SP specific advance notice effect based on the jackpot lottery result and the effect random number value 5.

  FIG. 101 (a) is a diagram showing an SP-specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the SP specific advance notice effect execution judgment table, a combination of data indicating effect random number 5 and necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is referred to when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot A big hit lottery result is divided and stored in what is referred to when there is a loss. Specifically, for the jackpot lottery result, for the jackpot, data indicating that five (0 to 4) effect random number values for effect 5 execute the SP specific notice effect, and 95 (5 to 99) for effect The random number 5 is associated with data indicating that the SP specific advance notice effect is not to be executed. As for the big hit lottery result, with regard to the loss, 100 (0 to 99) effect random number values 5 are associated with data indicating that the SP specific advance notice effect is not performed.

  In step S1648-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the SP-specific advance notice effect execution determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. When the determination result is “execute” (S1648-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1648-3. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1648-2: No), the current SP specific notice presentation selection process is ended.

  In step S1648-3, the sub CPU 120a performs the SP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process, and then proceeds to step S1648-4. In the SP-specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 6 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the SP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines an effect pattern of the SP specific advance notice effect based on the effect random number value 6.

  FIG. 101 (b) is a diagram showing an SP-specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table. In the SP-specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table, a set of effect random number 6 and SP-specific notice effect timing data is stored.

  Specifically, there are SP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY11 and SPY12 as options in this table. The SP-specific advance notice effect timing data SPY11 is to execute the SP-specific advance notice effect immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. The SP-specific advance notice effect timing data SPY12 is for executing the SP-specified advance notice effect during the normal change of the change.

  In this table, three (0 to 2) effect random number values 6 are associated with the SP-specific advance notice effect timing data SPY11. 97 (3 to 99) effect random number values 6 are associated with the SP-specific advance notice effect timing data SPY12.

  In step S1648-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command for instructing execution of the SP specifying advance effect at the timing determined in the SP specific advance notification effect execution timing determination process, and transmits the generated effect pattern specifying command to the buffer Set to

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1648-4, the execution timing of the SP specific advance notice effect designated by the command (immediately after the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation or during normal fluctuation) The SP specific advance notice effect is executed by the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, and 33c, and the effect illumination device 34.

  Here, the SP-specific advance notice effect selection process is configured not to be performed when the SP reach effect is not performed in the change (step S1647 in FIG. 91: No). Further, in the table (FIG. 101 (a)) referred to in the SP specific advance presentation effect execution determination process (S1648-1 in FIG. 100) in the SP specific advance presentation effect selection process, the SP specific advance notice in the case where the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot The selection rate of the data indicating that the effect is to be performed is 5%, and the selection rate of the data that indicates that the SP specific advance notice effect is to be performed when the jackpot lottery result is a loss is 0%. Due to the flow of the process and the configuration of the table, the production control board 120 performs the SP specific advance notice production when the big hit notification production or the loss notification production is executed after the lose reach production during the fluctuation display of the special symbol. When the jackpot notification effect is executed through the execution of the SP reach effect after the lose reach effect, the SP specific advance notice effect can be performed.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the details of the SPSP specific preview effect presentation selection process (step S1650 in FIG. 91). In FIG. 102, the sub CPU 120a performs SPSP specific advance notice effect execution determination processing (S1650-1). In the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 7 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b and determines the necessity of execution of the SPSP specific advance notice effect based on the jackpot lottery result and the effect random number value 7.

  FIG. 103 (a) is a diagram showing the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution determination table. In the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution judgment table, a combination of data indicating effect random number 7 and necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is referred to when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot The jackpot lottery results are stored separately for reference when missing. Specifically, for the big hit lottery result is data indicating that five (0 to 4) effect random number values 7 execute the SPSP specific advance notice effect, and 95 (5 to 99) effects. The random number 7 is associated with data indicating that SPSP specific advance notice is not performed. As for the big hit lottery result, with regard to the loss, 100 (0 to 99) effect random number values 7 are associated with data indicating that the SPSP specific advance notice effect is not executed.

  In step S1650-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the SPSP specific advance announcement effect execution determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. If the determination result is “execute” (S1650-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1650-3. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1650-2: No), the current SPSP specific notice presentation selecting process is ended.

  In step S1650-3, the sub CPU 120a performs SPSP specific preview presentation execution timing determination processing, and then proceeds to step S1650-4. In the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 8 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines an effect pattern of the SPSP specific notice effect based on the effect random number value 8.

  FIG. 103 (b) is a diagram showing an SPSP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table. In the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table, a set of effect random number value 8 and an effect pattern of SPSP specific advance notice effect is stored.

  Specifically, there are SP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY21, SPY22, and SPY23 as options in this table. The SP-specific advance notice effect timing data SPY 21 is to execute the SP-specific advance notice effect immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. The SP-specific advance notice effect timing data SPY22 is for executing the SPSP-specific notice effect during the normal change of the change. The SP-specific advance notice effect timing data SPY 23 is for executing the SPSP-specific advance notice effect during the SP reach effect of the variation.

  In this table, three (0 to 2) effect random number values 8 are associated with the SPSP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY22. 97 (3 to 99) effect random number values 8 are associated with the SPSP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY23. The SPSP specific advance notice effect timing data SPY 21 is not associated with even one of the effect random number values 8.

  In step S1650-4, the sub CPU 120a generates a presentation pattern designation command instructing execution of the SPSP identification advance presentation effect at the timing determined in the SPSP identification advance announcement effect execution timing determination process, and transmits the generated effect pattern designation command to the buffer Set to

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1650-4, the execution timing of the SPSP specific advance notice effect designated by the command (immediately after the start of the change, during normal change, or , SP reach effect), the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device 34 execute the SPSP specific advance notice effect.

  Here, the SPSP specific advance notice effect selection process is configured not to be executed when the SPSP reach effect is not executed in the change (step S1649 in FIG. 91: No). Also, in the table (FIG. 103 (a)) referred to in the SPSP specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1650-1 in FIG. 102) in the SPSP specific advance notice effect selection process, the SPSP specific advance notice in the case where the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot The selection rate of data indicating execution of the effect is 5%, and the selection rate of data indicating execution of the SPSP specific advance notice effect in the case where the jackpot lottery result is a loss is 0%. Due to the flow of the process and the configuration of the table, when the big hit notification effect or the loss notification effect is executed after the lose reach effect during the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the effect control board 120 displays the SPSP specific notice effect. When the jackpot notification effect is executed after the execution of the SPSP reach effect after the loss reach effect, the SPSP specific advance notice effect can be executed.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the details of the speech operation effect operation result determination process (step S1652 in FIG. 91). In FIG. 104, the sub CPU 120a performs a dialogue speaker determination process (S1652-1). In the dialogue speaker determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 9 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120 a refers to the speech speaker determination table of the sub ROM 120 b and determines a character to be a speech speaker based on the effect random number value 9.

  FIG. 105 (a) is a diagram showing a speech speaker determination table. A pair of effect random number 9 and characters A, B, C, and D is stored in the speech speaker determination table. Specifically, 25 effect random number values 9 are associated with each of the characters A, B, C, and D.

  In step S1652-2, the sub CPU 120a performs speech determination processing. In the speech determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 10 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120 a refers to the speech determination table of the sub ROM 120 b and determines the speech based on the jackpot lottery result and the effect random number 10.

  FIG. 105 (b) is a diagram showing a speech determination table. In the speech decision table, each set of effect random number 10 and speech is stored separately as one to be referred to when the jackpot lottery result is a big hit and one to be referred to when the jackpot lottery result is a loss .

  Specifically, for the case where the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, 50 (0 to 49) random numbers 10 for the effect for "It's intense heat", 50 (50 to 99) for "It's a chance." The effect random number values 10 are associated with one another. None of the effect random number values 10 is associated with “...”. When the jackpot lottery result is a loss, 34 (0 to 33) random numbers 10 for the effect in "It's intense heat" and 33 (34 to 66) the random numbers for the effect in "It's a chance" “10” and “...” Are associated with 33 (67 to 99) effect random number values 10 respectively.

  In step S1652-3, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command of the operation result corresponding to the combination of the character determined in the speech requester determination process and the speech determined in the speech determination process, and the generated effect pattern specification command Set in the send buffer.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1652-3, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 wait for the rendering button 36 to be operated in the dialogue operation effect, and immediately after the operation of the effect button 36 The image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, and 33c, and the effect illumination device 34 execute the effect of the operation result designated by the command.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the details of the speech operation specification advance notice effect selection process (step S1655 in FIG. 91). In FIG. 106, the sub CPU 120a performs speech operation specific advance notice effect execution determination processing (S1655-1). In the speech operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 11 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue operation specific advance presentation effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and based on the execution timing of the speech operation effect within the variation and the random number value 11 for presentation, it is necessary or not to execute the dialogue operation specific advance announcement effect judge. Here, as described above, among the symbol variation effect patterns in the variation effect pattern determination table, those that execute serif operation effects immediately after the start of symbol variation (pattern variation effect patterns 111, 112, 121, 122, 011, 012, etc.) and those that perform speech operation effects after reaching the reach (pattern change effect patterns 114, 123, etc.). When the symbol variation effect patterns 111, 112, 121, 122, 011, 012, etc. are determined in the variation effect pattern determination process (step S1646 in FIG. 91), the execution timing of the speech operation effect is immediately after the start of the variation, the symbol When the fluctuation presentation patterns 114, 123, etc. are determined, the execution timing of the speech operation presentation is after reaching the reach.

  FIG. 107 (a) is a diagram showing a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination table. A combination of data indicating effect random number value 11 and necessity of execution ("execute" and "do not execute") in the speech operation specific advance notice effect execution judgment table is immediately after the start of fluctuation in the execution timing of the speech operation effect. It divides into what to refer to at a certain time, and the thing to refer to when it is after reach establishment, and is memorized. Specifically, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 100 (0 to 99) effect random number values 11 are associated with data indicating that the speech operation specific advance notice is not performed. One of the effect random number values 11 is not associated with the data indicating that the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect is to be executed. After reach is established, data indicating that 30 (0 to 29) effect random number values 11 execute the dialogue operation specific advance presentation effect, and 70 (30 to 99) effect random number values 11 are speech operation It is each matched with the data which show not performing specific notice production | presentation.

  In step S1655-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms which of “execute” and “do not execute” the determination result of the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution determination process. If the determination result is "execute" (S1655-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1655-3. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1655-2: No), the current dialogue operation specific advance notice effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1655-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a speech operation specification advance notice effect execution timing determination process, and then proceeds to step S1655-4. In the speech operation specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 12 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and the dialogue determined in the speech determination process (S1652-2 in FIG. 104) in the dialogue operation effect operation result determination process, and the disorder for presentation Based on the numerical value 12, an effect pattern of the speech operation specific advance notice effect is determined.

  FIG. 107 (b) is a diagram showing a dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution timing determination table. When the combination of the effect random number 12 and the dialogue operation specific advance presentation timing data is referred to when the line is "...", "Chance is". What is referred to, "It is intense heat" is divided and stored in what is referred to.

  More specifically, the options on this table include speech operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY11, SRY12, and SRY13. The dialogue operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY11 is to execute the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. The speech operation identification advance notice effect timing data SRY12 is for executing the speech operation identification advance effect during the normal change of the fluctuation. The dialogue operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY13 is to execute the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect after the reach of the variation is established. About "It is intense heat", the random number value 12 of 40 (0-39) effects for serif operation specific advance notice production timing data SRY12, 60 (40 to 99) for serif operation specific advance production timing data SRY13 The effect random number values 12 are associated with one another. A single random number value for effect 12 is not associated with the speech operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY11. As for "I have a chance," 50 (0 to 49) random numbers 12 for effect for the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY12, and 50 (50 to 99) for the talk operation specific advance effect timing data SRY13. The effect random number values 12 are associated with one another. A single random number value for effect 12 is not associated with the speech operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY11. For “...”, 90 (0 to 89) random numbers 12 for effect in the dialogue operation specific advance announcement effect timing data SRY12 and 10 (90 to 99) effects in the speech operation specific advance announcement effect timing data SRY13 The random number values 12 are associated with one another. A single random number value for effect 12 is not associated with the speech operation specific advance notice effect timing data SRY11.

  In step S1655-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command instructing execution of the speech operation specific advance announcement effect at the timing determined in the speech operation specific advance announcement effect execution timing determination process, and the generated effect pattern specification command Set in the send buffer.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1655-4, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the speech operation specific advance notice effect at the timing designated by the command. The effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the effect illumination device 34 are made to execute.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 16, the dialogue operation effect is an operation promotion effect (an image imitating the effect button 35, an indicator image showing an operation acceptance effective period, and an effect of causing an image of “press!” To appear) , And an operation result effect (a character A, B, C, or D appears and a word is displayed in a speech balloon) to progress from there. In the table (Fig. 107 (a)) referred to in the specific advance notice effect execution determination process (S1655-1) in the line operation specific advance notice effect selection process, the execution timing of the line operation effect is immediately after the start of the variation display of the special symbol The selection rate of the data that indicates that the dialogue specific notice effect in the case is to be performed is 0%, and the data that indicates that the dialogue specific notice effect is to be performed in the case where the execution timing of the dialogue operation effect is after reaching reach The selectivity of is 30%. In the table (FIG. 107 (b)) referenced in the dialogue operation specific advance notice effect execution timing determination process (S1655-3), when the dialogue as the operation result is "...", The case of "a chance" The selection rate of data in which the execution timing of the speech operation specific advance notice effect in the case of “It is intense heat” immediately after the start of fluctuation is 0%. By such a flow of processing and the configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 regulates that the speech operation specific advance notice effect is executed immediately after the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. Immediately after the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the effect control board 120 can execute only the operation promotion effect without the serif operation specific notice presentation, and at the timing excluding the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the serif operation is specified It is possible to execute both the operation promotion effect accompanied by the advance notice effect and the operation promotion effect without the speech operation specific notice effect.

  FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the details of the shortening variation advance presentation effect selection process (step S1666 in FIG. 92). In FIG. 108, the sub CPU 120a performs a reduction variation advance presentation effect execution determination process (S1666-1). In the shortening variation advance presentation effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 13 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the shortening fluctuation advance presentation execution execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the necessity of execution of the shortening fluctuation advance presentation based on the effect random number value 13.

  FIG. 109 (a) is a diagram showing a reduction fluctuation advance presentation execution determination table. A set of data indicating the effect random number value 13 and necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is stored in the shortening variation advance presentation effect execution determination table. Specifically, data indicating that 30 (0 to 29) effect random number values 13 execute shortening fluctuation advance effects, and 70 (30 to 99) effect random number values 13 are shortened fluctuation announcement effects Are respectively associated with data indicating that no execution is to be performed.

  In step S1666-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms which of “execute” and “do not execute” the determination result of the shortening variation advance presentation execution determination process. If the determination result is "execute" (S1666-2: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1666-3. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1666-2: No), the current reduction variation advance presentation effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1666-3, the sub CPU 120a performs processing for determining the shortening fluctuation advance presentation execution timing, and then proceeds to step S1666-4. In the shortening variation advance presentation effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 14 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the shortening variation advance presentation execution timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the presentation pattern of the shortening variation advance presentation based on the effect random number.

  FIG. 109 (b) is a diagram showing a shortening variation advance presentation execution timing determination table. In the shortening variation advance presentation execution timing determination table, a set of effect random number 14 and shortening variation advance presentation timing data is stored.

  Specifically, among the options of this table, there are reduced fluctuation advance presentation effect timing data TSY11, TSY12, and TSY13. The shortening change advance notice effect timing data TSY11 is to execute the shortening change advance notice effect immediately after the start of the change of the change. The shortening fluctuation advance notice effect timing data TSY12 is to execute the shortening fluctuation advance notice effect during the fluctuation of the fluctuation (at a timing later than immediately after the start of fluctuation and earlier than immediately before the stop of fluctuation). The shortening change advance notice effect timing data TSY13 is to execute the shortening change advance notice effect immediately before the change stop of the change. 90 (0 to 89) effect random number values 14 correspond to the shortened fluctuation advance notice effect timing data TSY12, and 10 (90 to 99) effect random number values 14 correspond to the shortened fluctuation advance effect timing data TSY13. It is attached. One of the effect random number values 14 is not associated with the shortened variation advance presentation effect timing data TSY11.

  In step S1666-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command instructing execution of the shortening change annunciation effect at the timing determined in the shortening change annunciation effect executing timing determination process, and transmits the generated effect pattern designating command to the buffer Set to

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1666-4, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect of the shortening fluctuation advance presentation effect at the timing designated by the command. This is performed by the driving devices 33a, 33b and 33c and the lighting device 34 for effect.

  Here, in the table (FIG. 109 (b)) referred to in the shortening fluctuation advance presentation execution timing determination process (S1666-3) in the shortening fluctuation advance presentation effect selection process, the execution timing of the shortening fluctuation advance presentation effect is immediately after the start of fluctuation. The data selectivity is 0%. By such a flow of processing and the configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 regulates that the shortening fluctuation advance notice effect is executed immediately after the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The effect control board 120 regulates that the shortened fluctuation advance notice effect is executed immediately after the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and executes the shortened fluctuation advance notice effect at the timing excluding the time immediately after the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol.

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the details of the out-of-time notice effect selection process (step S1667 in FIG. 92). In FIG. 110, the sub CPU 120a performs an off notice production execution determination process (S1661). In the advance notice effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 15 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the disconnection notice effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the necessity of execution of the exit notice effect based on the effect random number value 15.

  FIG. 111 (a) is a diagram showing a disconnection notice effect execution determination table. A combination of data indicating the effect random number value 15 and necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is referred to when the jackpot result is a big hit and is referred to when there is a big win It is divided into things to be referenced and stored. Specifically, for the jackpot, 100 (0 to 99) effect random number values 15 are associated with data indicating that the out-of-the-box announcement effect is not performed. None of the effect random number values 15 is associated with the data indicating that the out-of-the-box announcement effect is to be executed. Regarding loss, data indicating that 30 (0 to 29) effect random number values 15 perform out-of-time notice effects and 70 (30 to 99) effect random number values 15 do not execute out-of-time notice effects Data indicating that each is associated with each other.

  In step S1667-2, the sub CPU 120a confirms which of “execute” and “do not execute” the determination result of the out-of-time notice effect execution determination process. If the determination result is “execute” (S1667-2: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1667-3. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1667-2: No), the present out-of-time notice effect selection processing is ended.

  In step S1667-3, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of determining the timing of execution of a disconnection notice effect execution, and then proceeds to step S1667-4. In the advance notice effect execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 16 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the off notice generation execution timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the effect pattern of the off notice effect based on the presence or absence of reach in the variation and the effect random number value 16.

  FIG. 111 (b) is a diagram showing a disconnection notice effect execution timing determination table. In the out-of-date notice effect execution timing determination table, a combination of effect random number value 16 and out-of-date notice effect timing data is referred to when the change is not the reach establishment (normal change or shortening change), The change is stored separately as a reference when the reach is established.

  Specifically, the options on this table include out-of-time notice effect timing data HZY11, HZY12, HZY13, and HZY14. The advance notice effect timing data HZY11 is to execute an advance notice effect immediately after the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation. The departure notice effect timing data HZY12 is to execute out-of-sight notice effect during the normal change of the change. The departure notice effect timing data HZY13 is to execute a notice effect of leaving after reaching the reach of the fluctuation. The advance notice effect timing data HZY14 is to execute an advance notice effect immediately before the change stops. For no reach establishment, 90 (0 to 89) effect random number 16 for effect are included in the out-of-the-box notice effect timing data HZY12, and ten (90 to 99) effect random number values 16 in the fore-out notice effect timing data HZY14, Each is associated. None of the effect random number values 16 is associated with the out-of-time notice effect timing data HZY11 and HZY13. As to whether the reach is established, two (0 to 1) effect random number values 16 for out-of-the-box notice effect timing data HZY12, and two (2 to 3) effect random number values 16 for the out-of-time notice effect timing data HZY13, Ninety-six (4 to 99) effect random number values 16 are associated with the out-of-time notice effect timing data HZY14, respectively. None of the effect random number values 16 is associated with the out-of-time notice effect timing data HZY11.

  In step S1667-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern designating command instructing execution of the outlier advance effect at the timing determined in the advance notification effect execution timing determination process, and sets the generated effect pattern designating command in the transmission buffer. Do.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1667-4, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the for-effect announcement effect at the timing designated by the command. The driving devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the effect illumination device 34 are made to execute.

  Here, in the table (FIG. 111 (b)) referred to in the out-of-the-box announcement effect execution timing determination process (S1667-3) in the out-of-the-box announcement effect selection process, selection of data with the execution timing of the out-of-box announcement effect as the change start The rate is 0%. By such a flow of processing and the configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 regulates that the advance notice effect for deviation is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol. The effect control board 120 regulates that the advance notice effect for deviation is executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and causes the out-of-early notice effect to be executed at the timing except immediately after the start of the change display of the special symbol.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing details of the mode effect control process (step S1668 in FIG. 92). In FIG. 112, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the advanced training mode in progress flag is set in the advanced training mode in progress flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1668-1). If the special training mode in-progress flag is set (S1668-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1668-2. When the special training mode in-execution flag is not set (S1668-1: No), the mode effect control process of this time is ended. The special training mode in-progress flag is a flag indicating that the special training mode is in progress. The special training mode in-progress flag is set in step S1697-2 (FIG. 126) in the special training mode start control process (S1697 in FIG. 93) after the special game when the normal winning is won.

  In step S1668-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the special training mode remaining number counter of the sub RAM 120c is zero. If the special training mode remaining number counter is not 0 (S1668-2: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1668-3. If the special training mode remaining number counter is 0 (S1668-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1668-4. The special training mode remaining number counter is set to 100 in step S1697-3 (FIG. 126) in the special training mode start control process (S1697 in FIG. 93) after the special game is won, when the normal winning is won.

  In step S1668-3, the sub CPU 120a updates the special training mode remaining number counter by one. Thereafter, the mode effect control process of this time is ended.

  In step S1668-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command of the special training mode end effect, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1668-5, the sub CPU 120a clears the in-training mode executing flag of the in-training mode executing flag storage area. Thereafter, the mode effect control process of this time is ended.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in the step S1668-4, the special training mode end effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the lighting device 34 for effect.

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing details of the stage change determination process (step S1623 in FIG. 90). In FIG. 113, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the current game mode is the normal mode (S1623-1). If the gaming state information in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 120c is of the non-time-saving gaming state and the low probability gaming state, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If the current game mode is the normal mode (S1623-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1632. If the current game mode is either the training mode or the live mode (S1623: No), the current stage change determination process is ended.

  In step S1623, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the start winning designation command stored in the effect information storage area in the start winning designation command storage processing is that of the winning prize information. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1623-3 if the start winning combination designation command is that of lost prize information (S1623-2: Yes). If the start winning combination designation command is that of the jackpot winning information (S1623-2: No), the current stage change determination processing is ended.

  In step S1623-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the stage change notification standby flag is set in the stage change notification standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the stage change advance notice standby flag is not set (S1623-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1623-4. When the stage change advance notice standby flag is set (S1623-3: Yes), the current stage change determination process is ended. The stage change notice standby flag is a flag indicating that execution of the stage change notice effect is awaited.

  In step S1623-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not all of the pending calls are lost. If all of the start winning designation commands in the storage section of the effect information storage area are of lost prize information, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If there is a jackpot winning command among the start winning command designation commands in the storage unit of the effect information storage area, the determination result of this step is "No". The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1623-5 if all of the pending items are lost (S1623-4: Yes). If there is a big hit in the hold (S1623-4: No), the sub CPU 120a ends the current stage change determination process.

  In step S1623-5, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change execution determination processing. In the stage change execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 17 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b and determines the necessity of execution of the stage change based on the number of changes from the previous stage change and the effect random number 17.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a stage change execution determination table. In the stage change execution determination table, a set of data indicating effect random number 17 and necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) has a variation count of 0 to 9 from the previous stage change. Divided into those to be referred to, those to be referred to when the number of changes from the previous stage change is 10 to 19 times, and those to be referred to when the number of changes from the previous stage change is 20 or more It is memorized. In this table, data indicating execution of a stage change is more easily selected as the number of changes from the previous stage change increases. Specifically, for 0 to 9 times, 20 (0 to 19) effect random number values 17 are associated with data indicating that a stage change is to be performed, and 80 (20 to 99) The effect random number is associated with data indicating that no stage change is to be performed. For 10 to 19 times, 50 (0 to 49) effect random number values 17 are associated with data indicating that a stage change is to be performed, and 50 (50 to 99) effect random number values 17 Are associated with data indicating that no stage change is to be performed. For 20 or more times, 80 (0 to 79) effect random number values 17 are associated with data indicating that a stage change is to be performed, and 20 (80 to 99) effect random number values 17 are It is associated with data indicating that a stage change is not to be performed.

  In step S1623-6, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the stage change effect execution determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. If the determination result is “execute” (S1623-6: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1623-7. If the determination result is “do not execute” (S1623-6: No), the current stage change determination process is ended.

  In step S1623-7, the sub CPU 120a sets a stage change waiting flag in the stage change waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1623-8.

  In step S1623-8, the sub CPU 120a performs a new stage determination process. In the new stage determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 18 updated in step S1100. In the new stage determination process, the sub CPU 120 a refers to the new stage determination table of the sub ROM 120 b and determines a new stage based on the effect random number 18.

  FIG. 115 shows a new stage determination table. In the new stage determination table, pairs of effect random number 18 and stage data indicating a new stage after change in stage change are stored for each corresponding to the current stay stage.

  Specifically, if the current stage is a marine stage, the options are the savanna stage and the cosmo stage, and if the current stage is the savanna stage, the marine stage and the cosmo stage are available. There is a marine stage and a savanna stage as choices in the case of the Cosmo stage. Each of the options is associated with 50 effect random number values 18 respectively.

  In step S1623-9, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change timing determination processing. The stage change timing determination process is a process of determining whether the stage change is to be performed in which of the change and the change in the pending state. The sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 19 updated in step S1100. In the stage change timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change timing determination table of the sub ROM 120b and determines the stage change timing based on the number of pending changes in the first special symbol and the random number 19 for effect. .

  FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a stage change timing determination table. In the stage change timing determination table, a set of effect random number 19 and stage change timing data is stored for each of the numbers corresponding to the number of pending changes of the first special symbol.

  There is stage change timing data STC10 as an option corresponding to the number of pendings. The stage change timing data STC10 indicates that a stage change is to be performed in the fluctuation. One hundred (0 to 99) effect random number values 19 are associated with the stage change timing data STC10.

  There are stage change timing data STC10 and STC11 as options corresponding to one pending number. The stage change timing data STC11 indicates that the stage change is performed after the change capture has progressed to the change of the first hold at the time of execution of the stage change timing determination process (start winning prize time). 50 (0 to 49) effect random number values 19 are associated with the stage change timing data STC 10, and 50 (50 to 99) effect random number values 19 are associated with the stage change timing data STC 11, respectively. ing.

  Stage change timing data STC10, STC11, and STC12 exist as options corresponding to the number of pending two. The stage change timing data STC12 indicates that the stage change is performed after the change capture has progressed to the change of the second hold at the time of execution of the stage change timing determination process (starting winning time). Stage change timing data STC10 has 34 (0 to 33) effect random number values 19; stage change timing data STC11 has 33 (34 to 66) effect random number values 19; 33 (67 to 99) effect random number values 19 are associated with the STC 12 respectively.

  There are stage change timing data STC10, STC11, STC12, and STC13 as options corresponding to the number of reservations of three. The stage change timing data STC 13 indicates that the stage change is performed after the end of the digest order until the fluctuation of the third hold at the time of execution of the stage change timing determination process (starting winning time). Stage change timing data STC10 has 25 (0 to 24) effect random number values 19; stage change timing data STC11 has 25 (25 to 49) effect random number values 19; Twenty-five (50 to 74) effect random number values 19 are associated with the STC 12, and twenty-five (75 to 99) effect random number values 19 are associated with the stage change timing data STC 13, respectively.

  There are stage change timing data STC10, STC11, STC12, STC13, and STC14 as options corresponding to the number of reservations of four. The stage change timing data STC14 indicates that the stage change is performed after the change capture has progressed to the change of the fourth hold at the time of execution of the stage change timing determination process (the start winning prize time). Stage change timing data STC10 has 20 (0 to 19) effect random number values 19; stage change timing data STC11 has 20 (20 to 39) effect random number values 19; The STC 12 has 20 (40 to 59) effect random number values 19; the stage change timing data STC 13 has 20 (60 to 79) effect random number values 19; the stage change timing data STC 14 has Twenty (80 to 99) effect random number values 19 are associated with one another.

  In step S1623-10, the sub CPU 120a generates stage data of the new stage according to the determination of the new stage determination process and the stage change timing determination process, and stores the stage data in the corresponding storage unit of the effect information storage area. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a changes the 0th storage unit of the effect information storage area when the stage changes in the variation, and the first storage unit of the first effect information storage area when the stage changes in the first suspension change. The second storage unit of the first effect information storage area in the case of stage change in the second suspension fluctuation, the third storage unit of the first effect information storage area in the case of stage change in the third suspension fluctuation, When stage change occurs in the fourth pending change, the fourth storage unit of the first effect information storage area is used as a data storage destination, and stage data of a new stage is stored in the storage unit of the data storage destination. Here, when the storage destination of stage data is any of the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the effect information storage area, the stage data stored in the storage unit is subjected to storage area shift processing (S1641 in FIG. 90). Is shifted to the previous storage unit each time.

  FIGS. 117, 118, and 119 are flowcharts showing the details of the stage change advance presentation effect selection process (step S1625 in FIG. 90). In FIG. 117, the sub CPU 120a determines in the stage change timing determination process (step S1623-9 in FIG. 113) whether to change the stage due to the change or determines to change the stage due to the change in the pending state. (S1625-1). If the sub CPU 120a changes the stage due to the change (S1625-1: Yes), the current stage change notification effect selection process ends. If the stage change is performed due to the change in the pending state (S1625-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-2.

  In step S1625-2, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change advance presentation effect execution determination processing. In the stage change advance presentation effect execution determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 20 updated in step S1100. The sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change advance presentation effect execution determination table of the sub ROM 120b, and determines the necessity of execution of the stage change advance presentation effect based on the effect random number value 20.

  FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a stage change advance presentation effect execution determination table. In the stage change advance presentation effect execution determination table, a set of data indicating the effect random number value 20 and necessity of execution (“execute” and “do not execute”) is stored. Specifically, 20 (0 to 19) effect random number values 20 are associated with data indicating that the stage change notice effect is to be executed, and 80 (20 to 99) effect random number values 20 Is associated with data indicating that no stage change advance presentation effect is to be performed.

  In step S1625-3, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the determination result of the stage change advance presentation effect execution determination process is “execute” or “do not execute”. If the determination result is "execute" (S1625-3: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1625-4. If the determination result is "do not execute" (S1625-3: No), the current stage change notice presentation selection process is ended.

  In step S1625-4, the sub CPU 120a sets a stage change notification standby flag in the stage change notification standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1625-5. The stage change advance notice standby flag is a flag indicating that execution of the stage change advance notice effect is awaited.

  In step S1625-5, the sub CPU 120a performs stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination processing. The stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination process is a process for determining at which timing the stage change advance presentation effect is to be performed. The sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value 21 updated in step S1100. In the stage change preview production execution timing determination process, the sub CPU 120a refers to the stage change preview production execution timing determination table in the sub ROM 120b, and is determined in the stage change timing determination process (S1623-9 in FIG. 113) in the stage change determination process. The timing of the stage change is determined based on the execution timing of the stage change and the effect random number 21.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a stage change advance announcement effect execution timing determination table. In the stage change preview effect execution timing determination table, a set of effect random number value 21 and stage change preview effect execution timing data is stored for each corresponding to the execution timing of the stage change.

  There are stage change advance presentation effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, and SCY13 as options when the execution timing of the stage change is displaying the first pending change display. The stage change advance notice effect execution timing data SCY11 indicates that the stage change advance notice effect is to be executed immediately after the start of the first pending change display. The stage change advance notice effect execution timing data SCY12 indicates that the stage change advance notice effect is to be executed immediately before the stop of the first pending change display. The stage change advance notice effect execution timing data SCY13 indicates that the stage change advance notice effect is to be executed immediately after the stop of the first pending change display. One hundred (0 to 99) effect random number values 21 are associated with the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing data SCY11. One of the effect random number values 21 is not associated with the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing data SCY12 and SCY13.

  As the options when the execution timing of the stage change is in the second pending change display, there are stage change advance presentation effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, and SCY23. The stage change advance notice effect execution timing data SCY21 indicates that the stage change advance notice effect is to be executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the second hold. The stage change advance notice effect execution timing data SCY22 indicates that the stage change advance notice effect is to be executed immediately before the stop of the second pending change display. The stage change advance notice effect execution timing data SCY23 indicates that the stage change advance notice effect is to be executed immediately after the second pending change display is stopped. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY12 has 34 (0 to 33) effect random number values 21. The stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY13 has 33 (34 to 66) effect random number values 21. However, 33 (67 to 99) effect random number values 21 are associated with the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing data SCY21. One of the effect random number values 21 is not associated with the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY22, and SCY23.

  As the options when the execution timing of the stage change is displaying the third pending change, there are stage change advance presentation effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, SCY31, SCY32, and SCY33. The stage change advance notice effect execution timing data SCY31 indicates that the stage change advance notice effect is to be executed immediately after the start of the third pending change display. The stage change advance notice effect execution timing data SCY 32 indicates that the stage change advance notice effect is to be executed immediately before the stop of the third pending change display. The stage change advance notice effect execution timing data SCY33 indicates that the stage change advance notice effect is to be executed immediately after the stop of the variable display of the third hold. 34 (0 to 33) effect random number values 21 are for stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY22, and 33 (34 to 66) effect random number values 21 for stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY23 However, 33 (67 to 99) effect random number values 21 are associated with the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing data SCY31, respectively. One of the effect random number values 21 is not associated with the stage change advance notice effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY32, and SCY33.

  Stage change announcement execution timing is during the fourth display of the pending display of variation display timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, SCY32, SCY32, SCY33, SCY41, SCY42, And SCY 43. The stage change advance notice effect execution timing data SCY 41 indicates that the stage change advance notice effect is to be executed immediately after the start of the change display of the fourth hold. The stage change advance notice effect execution timing data SCY42 indicates that the stage change advance notice effect is to be executed immediately before the stop of the fourth pending change display. The stage change advance notice effect execution timing data SCY 43 indicates that the stage change advance notice effect is to be executed immediately after the stop of the fourth pending change display. 34 (0 to 33) effect random number values 21 for the stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY32, and 33 (34 to 66) effect random number values 21 for the stage change notice effect execution timing data SCY33 However, 33 (67 to 99) effect random number values 21 are associated with the stage change advance notification effect execution timing data SCY 41, respectively. No effect random number value 21 is associated with any of the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, SCY42, and SCY43.

  Here, in this table, in the case of stage change during the 1st pending change display, the selection rate of the notice effect execution timing data SCY11 in which immediately after the start of the 1st hold change display is the execution timing of the stage change advance presentation effect. Is 100%, and the selection rate of the other notice effect execution timing data SCY12, 13 is 0%.

  In addition, when stage change is performed during the second hold variation display, the preview production execution timing data SCY12 with the execution timing of the stage change notice effect immediately before the stop of the first hold variation display which is one before the end of the digestion order. Notice production execution timing data SCY13 with the execution timing of the stage change announcement production immediately after the suspension of the 1st suspension of fluctuation display and the announcement production execution timing with the stage change announcement production immediately after the start of the 2nd suspension of fluctuation display The selectivity of the data SCY21 is 33% to 34%, and the selectivity of the other notification effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY22, and SCY23 is 0%.

  In addition, for stage change during the 3rd pending change display, notice effect execution timing data SCY22 with the execution timing of the stage change advance presentation effect immediately before the stop of the 2nd pending change display which is one before the end of the digestion order. Notice production execution timing data SCY23 with the execution timing of the stage change announcement production immediately after the suspension of the second suspension fluctuation display and the announcement production execution timing with the stage change announcement production immediately after the start of the third suspension fluctuation display The selection rate of the data SCY31 is 33% to 34%, and the selection rates of the other notification effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY32, and SCY33 are 0%.

  In addition, for stage change during the 4th pending fluctuation display, notice production execution timing data SCY32 in which immediately before the stop of the 3rd pending fluctuation display immediately before the end of the last pending fluctuation display is the execution timing of the stage change advance presentation effect, Notice production execution timing data SCY33 with the execution timing of the stage change notice production immediately after the suspension of the third suspension fluctuation display and the notice production execution timing with the stage change announcement production execution timing immediately after the start of the fourth suspension fluctuation display The selection rate of the data SCY41 is 33% to 34%, and the selection rates of the other notification effect execution timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, SCY31, SCY42, and SCY43 are 0%.

  With such a configuration of the table, the effect control board 120 determines the execution of the stage change in the stage change execution determination process (S1623-5 in FIG. 113) in the stage change determination process triggered by the start winning combination, and is continued If execution of the stage change advance announcement effect is determined in the stage change advance announcement effect execution determination process (S1625-2 in FIG. 117) in the stage change advance announcement effect selection process, the change display for which the stay change is scheduled to be performed is determined. Immediately after the start of the variable display in which the order of digestion is the previous one, it is controlled that the effect that suggests that the stage change is changed in the next variable display of the variable display is executed as the stage change advance presentation effect. In this case, the stage control board 120 has a stage change in the next variable display of the variable display immediately before or after the stop display of the variable display whose digestion order is earlier than the variable display for which the execution of the stay change is scheduled. It is possible to make an effect suggesting a change be performed as a stage change notice effect.

  In step S1625-6, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change preview effect determined in the stage change preview effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the start of the first pending change display. If the timing data SCY11 in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If it is immediately after the start of the variable display of the first hold (S1625-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-7. If it is not immediately after the start of the variable display of the first suspension (S1625-6: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-9.

  In step S1625-7, the sub CPU 120a sets 1 in the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. The stage change notice standby counter is a counter that indicates the number of remaining variable displays until execution of the stage change notice effect. In the next step S1625-8, sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation in the timing flag storage area immediately after the start of fluctuation in sub RAM 120c. The timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation is a flag indicating that the execution timing of the stage change advance presentation effect is immediately after the start of the fluctuation display. Thereafter, the current stage change notice effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1625-9, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change preview effect determined in the stage change preview effect execution timing determination process is immediately before the suspension of the first hold of the fluctuation display. If the timing data SCY12 in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If it is immediately before the stop of the first suspended change display (S1625-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-10. If it is not immediately before the stop of the first suspended change display (S1625-9: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-12.

  In step S1625-10, the sub CPU 120a sets 1 in the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-11, sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately before the variation stop in the timing flag storage area immediately before the variation stop of sub RAM 120c. The timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is a flag indicating that the execution timing of the stage change advance presentation effect is immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display. Thereafter, the current stage change notice effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1625-12, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change preview effect determined in the stage change preview effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the suspension of the first suspension of the fluctuation display. If the timing data SCY13 in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If it is immediately after the suspension of the first suspended change display (S1625-12: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-13. If it is not immediately after the suspension of the first suspended change display (S1625-12: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-14.

  In step S1625-13, the sub CPU 120a sets 1 in the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. After that, without setting any timing flag, the current stage change notice effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1625-14, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change preview effect determined in the stage change preview effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the start of the second pending change display. If the timing data SCY21 in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When it is immediately after the start of the 2nd suspension change display (S1625-14: Yes), it progresses to Step S1625-15. If it is not immediately after the start of the second pending change display (S1625-14: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-17.

  In step S1625-15, the sub CPU 120a sets 2 in the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-16, sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation in the timing flag storage area immediately after the start of fluctuation in sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the current stage change notice effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1625-17, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change advance presentation effect determined in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination process is immediately before the stop of the second suspension of fluctuation display. If the timing data SCY22 in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If it is immediately before the stop of the second suspended change display (S 1625-17: Yes), the process proceeds to step S 1625-18. If it is not immediately before the stop of the second pending change display (S1625-17: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-20.

  In step S1625-1, the sub CPU 120a sets 2 in the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-19, sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately before the variation stop in the timing flag storage area immediately before the variation stop of sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the current stage change notice effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1625-20, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change preview effect determined in the stage change preview effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the suspension of the second hold of the fluctuation display. If the timing data SCY23 in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If it is immediately after the suspension of the second suspended change display (S1625-20: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-21. If it is not immediately after the suspension of the second pending change display (S1625-20: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-22 in FIG.

  In step S1625-1, the sub CPU 120a sets 2 in the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. After that, without setting any timing flag, the current stage change notice effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1625-22 in FIG. 119, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change advance presentation effect determined in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the start of the third hold change display. If the timing data SCY31 in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When it is immediately after the start of the 3rd suspension change display (S1625-22: Yes), it progresses to Step S1625-23. If it is not immediately after the start of the third pending change display (S1625-22: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-25.

  In step S1625-23, the sub CPU 120a sets 3 in the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-24, sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation in the timing flag storage area immediately after the start of fluctuation in sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the current stage change notice effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1625-25, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change preview effect determined in the stage change preview effect execution timing determination process is immediately before the stop of the third suspension of the fluctuation display. If the timing data SCY32 in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If it is immediately before the stop of the third pending change display (S1625-25: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-26. If it is not immediately before the stop of the variable display of the third suspension (S 1625-25: No), the process proceeds to step S 1625-28.

  In step S1625-26, the sub CPU 120a sets 3 in the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-27, sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately before the variation stop in the timing flag storage area immediately before the variation stop of sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the current stage change notice effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1625-28, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change preview effect determined in the stage change preview effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the suspension of the third suspension change display. If the timing data SCY33 in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If it is immediately after the suspension of the third suspension change display (S1625-28: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-29. If it is not immediately after the suspension of the third suspension change display (S1625-28: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-30.

  In step S1625-29, the sub CPU 120a sets 3 in the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. After that, without setting any timing flag, the current stage change notice effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1625-30, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change preview effect determined in the stage change preview effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the start of the fourth pending change display. If the timing data SCY 41 in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is “Yes”. If it is immediately after the start of the fourth pending change display (S1625-30: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1625-31. If it is not immediately after the start of the fourth pending change display (S1625-30: No), the process proceeds to step S1625-33.

  In step S1625-31, the sub CPU 120a sets 4 in the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-32, sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation in the timing flag storage area immediately after the start of fluctuation in sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the current stage change notice effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1625-33, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change preview effect determined in the stage change preview effect execution timing determination process is immediately before the suspension of the fourth suspension of the fluctuation display. If the timing data SCY42 in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is "Yes". When it is just before the stop of the change display of the 4th suspension (S1625-33: Yes), it progresses to Step S1625-34. When it is not immediately before the stop of the change display of the fourth suspension (S 1625-33: No), the process proceeds to step S 1625-36.

  In step S1625-34, the sub CPU 120a sets 4 in the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1625-35, sub CPU 120a sets the timing flag immediately before the variation stop in the timing flag storage area immediately before the variation stop of sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the current stage change notice effect selection process is ended.

  In step S1625-36, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the timing of the stage change preview effect determined in the stage change preview effect execution timing determination process is immediately after the suspension of the fourth suspension of fluctuation display. If the timing data SCY43 in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 121) is selected, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If it is immediately after the suspension of the fourth pending change display (S 1625-36: Yes), the process proceeds to step S 1625-37. When it is not immediately after the stop of the variation display of the fourth suspension (S 1625-36: No), the present stage change advance notice effect selection processing is ended.

  In step S1625-37, the sub CPU 120a sets 4 in the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c. After that, without setting any timing flag, the current stage change notice effect selection process is ended.

  FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the details of the stage change notice effect control process (step S1669 in FIG. 92) during symbol change. In FIG. 122, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the stage change notification standby flag is set in the stage change notification standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1669-1). If the stage change notice standby flag is set in the stage change notice effect execution determination process (S1625-4 in FIG. 117) in the stage change notice effect selection process, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If the stage change advance notice standby flag is set (S1669-1: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1669-2. When the stage change advance notice standby flag is not set (S1669-1: No), the current stage of the symbol change stage change advance notice effect control process is ended.

  In step S1669-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c is 1 or more. When the stage change notice standby counter is 1 or more (S1669-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a ends the current stage of the symbol change stage change notice effect control process. If the stage change announcement standby counter is 0 (S1669-2: No), the process proceeds to step S1669-3.

  In step S1669-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the timing flag immediately before the variation stop is set in the timing flag storage area immediately before the variation stop of the sub RAM 120c. If the timing data SCY12, SCY22, SCY32 or SCY42 of the execution timing immediately before the fluctuation stop is selected in the stage change advance presentation effect execution timing determination process (S1625-5 in FIG. 117) in the stage change advance presentation effect selection process, The determination result of this step is "Yes". If the timing flag immediately before the variable stop is set (S1669-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1669-8. If the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is not set (S1669-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1669-4.

  In step S1669-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation is set in the timing flag storage area immediately after the start of fluctuation of the sub RAM 120c. If the timing data SCY11, SCY21, SCY31, or SCY41 of the execution timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation is selected in the stage change announcement production execution timing determination process (S1625-5 in FIG. 117) in the stage change announcement production selection process, The determination result of this step is "Yes". If the timing data SCY13, SCY23, SCY33, or SCY43 of the execution timing immediately after the fluctuation stop is selected, the determination result of this step is "No". If the timing flag has been set immediately after the start of fluctuation (S1669-4: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1669-5. If the timing flag has not been set immediately after the start of the change (S1669-4: No), the current stage of the symbol change stage change notice effect control process is ended.

  In step S1669-5, the sub CPU 120a obtains a new stage after the change in stage change based on the stage data in the effect information storage area, sets a character related to the new stage as an appearance character, and causes this character to appear An effect pattern designating command of advance notice effect is generated, and the generated effect pattern designating command is set in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1669-6, the sub CPU 120a clears the stage change announcement standby flag in the stage change announcement standby flag storage area. In the next step 1667-7, the sub CPU 120a clears the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation. After that, the stage change notice effect control process during the present symbol change is ended.

  In step S1669-8, sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the predetermined timing immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display, and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to set the value immediately before the fluctuation stop of sub RAM 120c in the timer counter. After that, the stage change notice effect control process during the present symbol change is ended. The timer counter immediately before the fluctuation stop is counted down in the timer update process (S1500 of FIG. 89), and becomes 0 at a predetermined timing immediately before the stop of the fluctuation display.

  As soon as the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1669-8 (immediately after the start of the variable display), the stage change notice effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32. The effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device 34 are made to execute.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the details of the stage change advance notice effect control process (step S1672 in FIG. 93) while the symbol is stopped. In FIG. 123, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the stage change notification standby flag is set in the stage change notification standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1672-1). When the stage change advance notice standby flag is set (S1672-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1672-2. When the stage change advance notice standby flag is not set (S1672-1: No), the stage change notice effect control process is terminated while the current symbol is stopped.

  In step S1672-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c is 1 or more. If the sub CPU 120a determines that the stage change notification standby counter is 1 or more (S1672-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1672-3. If the stage change advance notice standby counter is 0 (S1672-2: No), the process proceeds to step S1672-4.

  In step S1672-3, the sub CPU 120a updates the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c by one. After that, the stage change notice effect control process during the current symbol stop is ended.

  In step S1672-4, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the timing flag immediately before the variation stop is set in the timing flag storage area immediately before the variation stop of the sub RAM 120c. If the timing flag immediately before the change stop is set (S1672-4: Yes), the current stage of the symbol stop stage change notice presentation effect control process is ended. If the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is not set (S1672-4: No), the process proceeds to step S1672-5.

  In step S1672-5, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timing flag immediately after the start of fluctuation is set in the timing flag storage area immediately after the start of fluctuation of sub RAM 120c. If the timing flag is set immediately after the start of the change (S1672-5: Yes), the current stage of the symbol change stage change effect control process is ended. If the timing flag has not been set immediately after the start of fluctuation (S1672-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1672-6.

  In step S1672-6, the sub CPU 120a obtains a new stage after the change in stage change, sets the character related to the new stage as an appearance character, and generates a stage change notice effect presentation command for causing this character to appear, and generates The selected effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1672-7, the sub CPU 120a clears the stage change announcement standby flag in the stage change announcement standby flag storage area. Thereafter, the mode effect control process of this time is ended.

  As soon as the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1672-6 (immediately after stopping the change display), the stage change notice effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32. The effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device 34 are made to execute.

  FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the details of the special game effect selection process (step S1691 in FIG. 93). In FIG. 124, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that has triggered the special game this time is a 2R probability variation (S1691-1). If the type of jackpot is a 2R probability variation hit (S1691-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-2. If it is not the 2R probability variation hit (S1691-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-3.

  In step S1691-2, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 2R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 2R in the effect pattern storage area.

  In step S1691-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that triggered the special game of this time is the 16R probability variation. If the type of jackpot is a 16R probability variation hit (S1691-3: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-4. If it is not the 16R probability variation hit (S1691-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-5.

  In step S1691-4, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 16R, and stores the information of the opening effect pattern per 16R in the effect pattern storage area.

  In step S1691-5, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the type of jackpot that has triggered the special game of this time is an 8R probability variation. If the type of jackpot is an 8R probability variation hit (S1691-5: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1691-6. If it is an 8R normal hit (S1691-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1691-7.

  In step S1691-6, the sub CPU 120a decides to perform the rank up success rendering, and executes the rank up rendering showing execution of the rank up success rendering in the fourth round individual rendering information storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Store data

  In step S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform rank up failure rendering, and executes rank up rendering indicating execution of rank up failure rendering in the fourth round individual effect information storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Store data

  After execution of step S1691-6 or S1691-7, the sub CPU 120a determines to perform the opening effect per 8R, and stores information of the opening effect pattern per 8R in the effect pattern storage area (S1691-8).

  In step S1691-9, the sub CPU 120a sets the effect pattern designating command of the opening effect determined in step S1691-2, S1691-4, or S1691-8 in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the special game selection process this time is ended.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the details of the round effect control process (step S 1693 in FIG. 93). In FIG. 125, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the round start command in the reception buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1). When the round start command in the reception buffer is for the fourth round (S1693-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-2. When it is a round other than the 4th round (S1693-1: No), it progresses to step S1963-6.

  In step S1693-2, the sub CPU 120a determines whether rank-up effect execution data is stored in the per-round effect information storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the rank-up effect execution data is stored (S1693-2: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-3. When rank up production execution data is not stored (S1693-2: No), it progresses to Step S1693-6.

  In step S1693-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether rank-up effect execution data in the effect information storage area by round indicates execution of rank-up success effect or execution of rank-up failure effect. judge. If the rank-up effect execution data indicates the execution of the rank-up success effect (S1693-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1693-4. If the rank-up effect execution data indicates the execution of a rank-up failure effect (S1693-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1693-5.

  In step S1693-4, the sub CPU 120a sets a rank up success staging flag in the rank up rendering success standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1693-5. The rank-up success production standby flag is a flag indicating that execution of the rank-up success production is awaited.

  In step S1693-5, sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the start time of the operation acceptance valid period in the rank up production of the current round (the fourth round), and divides this time by 2 milliseconds to sub RAM 120c. Set in the operation reception effective period start timer counter for the rank up effect of. Further, sub CPU 120a obtains the remaining time until the end time of the operation acceptance valid period in the rank up production of this round, divides this time by 2 milliseconds, and the operation acceptance valid for rank up production of sub RAM 120c Set in the period end timer counter. The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter and the operation acceptance valid period finish timer counter are counted down each time the timer updating process of step S1500 is executed. The operation acceptance valid period start timer counter becomes 0 at the start time of the operation acceptance valid period. The operation acceptance valid period end timer counter becomes 0 at the end time of the operation acceptance valid period.

  In step S1693-6, the sub CPU 120a sets an effect pattern designating command of the round effect of the current round to the transmission buffer.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the details of the advanced training mode start control process (step S1697 in FIG. 93). In FIG. 126, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the advanced training mode in progress flag is set in the advanced training mode in progress flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1697-1). If the special training mode in-execution flag is not set (S1697-1: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1697-2. If the special training mode in-progress flag is set (S 1697-1: Yes), the process skips step S 1697-2 and proceeds to the next step S 1697-3.

  In step S1697-2, the sub CPU 120a sets the special training mode in-progress flag in the special training mode in-progress flag storage area. In the next step S1697-3, the sub CPU 120a sets 100 in the special training mode remaining number counter of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1697-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command of the effect in the special training mode, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1697-4, the image display device 31 performs an effect related to the display of the background image in the training mode in the subsequent symbol variation effects. The voice output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, and 33c, and the effect illumination device 34 execute the process.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing details of the live mode start control process (step S1698 in FIG. 93). In FIG. 127, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the advanced training mode execution flag is set in the advanced training mode execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1698-1). If the special training mode in-progress flag is not set (S1698-1: No), the sub CPU 120a ends the current live mode start control process. If the special training mode in-progress flag is set (S1698-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1697-2.

  In step S1698-2, the sub CPU 120a clears the in-training mode executing flag of the in-training mode executing flag storage area. In the next step S1698-3, sub CPU 120a clears the special training mode remaining number counter of sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1698-4, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command of effect in live mode, and sets the generated effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1698-4, the image display apparatus 31 performs an effect related to the display of the background image in the live mode in the subsequent symbol variation effects. The voice output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, and 33c, and the effect illumination device 34 execute the process.

  FIGS. 128, 129, and 130 are flowcharts showing the details of the effect input control process (step S1700 in FIG. 89). In FIG. 128, the sub CPU 120a performs an operation information storage area update process (S1701). The operation information storage area updating process is a process for updating the information of the operation information storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

  FIG. 131 (a) shows an operation information storage area. FIG. 131 (b) is a diagram showing an example of updating the operation information storage area. As shown in FIG. 131 (a), the operation information storage area is an upper cursor key sampling signal storage area, a lower cursor key sampling signal storage area, a left cursor key sampling signal storage area, a right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and a central key There is a sampling signal storage area, an effect button sampling signal storage area, an effect button on edge storage area, an effect button off edge storage area, an effect button off edge number storage area, and an effect button on / off edge signal count storage area .

  Each of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on edge storage area, the effect button off edge storage area, the effect button off edge number storage area, and the effect button on / off edge signal count storage area is information on the latest sampling timing And a pre-sampling storage unit that stores information of the sampling timing one before (two milliseconds ago).

  In the operation information storage area updating process, the sub CPU 120a updates the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area based on the input signal of the detection switch 39a of the upper cursor key 39A. Further, the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39b of the lower cursor key 39B. Further, the left cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C. Further, based on the input signal of the detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D, the right cursor key sampling signal storage area is updated. Further, the central key sampling signal storage area is updated based on the input signal of the detection switch 39e of the central key 39E. Also, based on the input signal of the detection switch 35a of the effect button 35, the effect button sampling signal storage area, effect button on edge storage area, effect button off edge storage area, and effect button on / off edge signal number storage area are updated Do.

  More specifically, at the sampling timing every 2 milliseconds, if the input signal of the detection switch 39a is ON, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area, and the input signal of the detection switch 39a is OFF. If so, 0 is written to the upper cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39b is ON, 1 is written to the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39b is OFF, 0 is written to the lower cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39c is ON, 1 is written to the left cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39c is OFF, 0 is written to the left cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39d is ON, 1 is written to the right cursor key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39d is OFF, 0 is written to the right cursor key sampling signal storage area. If the input signal of the detection switch 39e is ON, 1 is written to the central key sampling signal storage area, and if the input signal of the detection switch 39e is OFF, 0 is written to the central key sampling signal storage area.

  The sub CPU 120a stores the information of the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area, the effect button on edge storage area, the effect button on edge storage area, and the effect button on / off edge signal count storage area in the previous sampling storage unit. Copy each one. Then, as shown in the update example of FIG. 131 (b), if the input signal of the detection switch 35a is ON, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 in the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area, and the detection switch 35a. If the input signal of is OFF, 0 is written in the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area. If the pre-sampling signal storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 0 and the latest sampling storage unit is 1 in the sub CPU 120a, 1 is written to the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button on edge signal storage area, and other combinations (If the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 1, the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 0, or the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 0), the effect button on edge signal storage area Write 0 to the latest sampling storage unit of.

  If the pre-sampling signal storage unit of the effect button sampling signal storage area is 1 and the latest sampling storage unit is 0, the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage unit of the effect button off edge signal storage area, and other combinations (If the previous sampling signal is 1 → the latest sampling signal is 1, the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 0, or the previous sampling signal is 0 → the latest sampling signal is 1), the effect button off-edge signal storage area Write 0 to the latest sampling storage unit of.

  If the sub CPU 120a writes 1 to the latest sampling storage section of the effect button sampling signal storage area, it rewrites the number to the number of the latest sampling storage sections of the effect button on-off edge signal number storage area +1 If 0 is written in the latest sampling storage unit of the signal storage area, the latest sampling storage unit of the number-of-effect-button on-off edge signal storage area is reset to 0.

  In step S1702 of FIG. 128, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the speech operation effect operation result standby flag is set in the speech operation effect operation result standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1703 when the speech operation effect operation result waiting flag is set (S1702: Yes). If the speech operation effect operation result waiting flag is not set (S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1708 in FIG.

  In step S1703, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter for speech operation effect presentation is 0. After the start time of the operation acceptance effective period of the speech operation effect, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1703: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1704. If the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1708 in FIG.

  In step S1704, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for the speech operation effect is 0 or not. If it is within the operation acceptance effective period of the speech operation effect, the determination result of this step is "No", and the determination result of this step is "Yes" at the end time of the operation acceptance effective period of the speech operation effect. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1704: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1705. If the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1704: YES), the process proceeds to step S1707.

  In step S1705, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit of the effect button on edge storage area. If it is immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If 1 is written (S1705: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1706. If 1 is not written (S1705: No), the process proceeds to step S1710 in FIG.

  In step S1706, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation specification command that instructs the progress to the operation result of the speech operation effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, the sub CPU 120a clears the speech operation effect operation result standby flag of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1708.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1706, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 produce an operation result of the speech operation effect (serif speaker determination process in the speech operation effect operation result determination process (FIG. In the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the drive device for effect, the character determined in S1652-1) of 104 appears and the speech to say the words determined in the serif determination process (S1652-2 in FIG. 104) 33a, 33b, 33c, and the lighting device 34 for effect.

  In step S1708 of FIG. 129, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether a challenge effect (success) wait flag is set in the challenge effect (success) wait flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the challenge effect (success) standby flag is set (S1708: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1709. If the challenge effect (success) standby flag is not set (S1708: No), the process proceeds to step S1716.

  In step S1709, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation reception valid period start timer counter for challenge effect is 0 or not. The determination result of this step becomes "Yes" after the start time of the operation reception effective period of the challenge effect. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1709: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1710. If the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1716.

  In step S1710, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the operation reception valid period end timer counter for challenge effect is 0. If it is within the operation reception effective period of the challenge effect, the judgment result of this step is "No", and the judgment result of this step is "Yes" at the end time of the operation reception effective period of the challenge effect. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1710: No), sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1711. If the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1710: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1712.

  In step S1711, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit of the effect button on edge storage area. If it is immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If 1 is written (S1711: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1712. If 1 is not written (S1711: No), the process proceeds to step S1716.

  In step S1712, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the first role drop waiting flag is set in the first feature drop waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1713 if the first object drop standby flag is set (S1712: Yes). If the first item drop standby flag is not set (S1712: No), the process proceeds to step S1716.

  In step S1713, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation specification command that instructs the progress to the operation result. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1714.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1713, the challenge reversion effect (the operation of the first movable part 330a, the display of the short hit notification effect image, and the short hit notification The image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, and 33c, and the effect illumination device 34 execute the effect with the output of the effect sound.

  In step S1714, the sub CPU 120a clears the challenge effect (success) wait flag in the challenge effect (success) wait flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1715, the sub CPU 120a clears the first product drop standby flag in the first product drop standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1716.

  In step S1716, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the surprise operation effect waiting flag is set in the surprise operation effect waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the surprise operation effect waiting flag is set (S1716: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1717. If the surprise operation effect waiting flag is not set (S1716: No), the process proceeds to step S1724 in FIG. 130.

  In step S1717, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation reception valid period start timer counter for the surprise operation effect presentation is 0. After the start time of the operation acceptance effective period of the surprise operation effect, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1717: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1718. If the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1717: No), the process proceeds to step S1724 in FIG.

  In step S1718, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for surprise operation effect presentation is 0. If it is within the operation acceptance effective period of the surprise operation effect, the determination result of this step is "No", and the determination result of this step is "Yes" at the end time of the operation acceptance effective period of the surprise operation effect. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1718: No), sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1719. If the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1718: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1720.

  In step S1719, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit of the effect button on edge storage area. If it is immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If 1 is written (S1719: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1720. If 1 is not written (S1719: No), the process proceeds to step S1724 in FIG.

  In step S1720, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the first role drop waiting flag is set in the first feature drop waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the first bonus item drop standby flag is set (S1720: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1721. If the first item drop standby flag is not set (S1720: No), the process proceeds to step S1724 in FIG. 130.

  In step S1721, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation specification command that instructs the progress to the operation result of the surprise operation effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1722.

  In step S1722, the sub CPU 120a clears the surprise operation effect waiting flag in the surprise operation effect waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. In the next step S1723, the sub CPU 120a clears the first feature drop waiting flag in the first feature drop waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1724 in FIG. 130.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1721, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 produce the operation result of the surprise operation effect (operation of the first movable part 330a, display of the big hit notification effect image, And, the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c, and the effect illumination device 34 execute the effect with the output of the big hit notification effect sound.

  In step S1724 of FIG. 130, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter for rank-up effect is 0 or not. The determination result of this step becomes "Yes" after the start time of the operation acceptance effective period of the continuous shot effect in the rank up effect. If the operation reception valid period start timer counter is 0 (S1724: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1725. If the operation acceptance valid period start timer counter is not 0 (S1724: No), the process proceeds to step S1735.

  In step S1725, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter for rank-up effect is 0 or not. If it is within the operation acceptance effective period of rank-up effect, the determination result of this step is "No", and the determination result of this step is "Yes" at the end time of the operation acceptance effective period. If the operation reception valid period end timer counter is not 0 (S1725: No), sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1726. If the operation acceptance valid period end timer counter is 0 (S1725: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1731.

  In step S1726, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit of the effect button on / off edge signal count storage area is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The predetermined value in this step is a value obtained by dividing a period (for example, 1 second) sufficient to determine that the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) by 2 milliseconds. Do. If the effect button 35 is continuously operated (pressed and held) for one second or more, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit of the effect button on / off edge signal count storage area is less than the predetermined value (S1726: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1727. If the value of the latest sampling signal storage unit of the effect button on / off edge signal count storage area is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1726: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1735.

  In step S1727, the sub CPU 120a determines whether 1 is written in the latest sampling signal storage unit of the effect button on edge storage area. If it is immediately after the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If 1 is written (S1727: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1728. If 0 is written (S1727: No), the process proceeds to step S1735.

In step S1728, the sub CPU 120a updates the number of consecutive strokes N _RD in the number of consecutive strokes storage area of the sub RAM 120c by one and updates it. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1729.

In step S1729, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the number of consecutive bats N _RD after update has reached 30. If the number of depressions of the effect button 35 after the display of the guidance image of “continuous hit!” Reaches 30 times, the determination result of this step becomes “Yes”, and if it does not reach 30 times, The determination result is "No". Sub CPU120a, when repeated pressing the number _{N RD} has not reached 30 (S1729: No), the process proceeds to step S1730. If repeated pressing the number _{N RD} has reached 30 (S1729: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1731.

  In step S1730, sub CPU 120a sets a rendering progress designation command in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1734.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1730, the image display device 31 and the audio output device 32 produce an effect of advancing the gauge development amount of the gauge image by a predetermined amount. , And effect lighting devices 34a, 33b, and 33c, and lighting devices 34 for effect.

  In step S1731, it is checked whether the rank-up success staging flag is set in the rank-up success staging flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The rank-up success effect waiting flag is set at the start of the fourth round game round in the special game per 8R probability variation. If the rank-up success staging flag is set (S1731: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1732. If the rank-up success staging flag is not set (S1731: No), the process proceeds to step S1733.

  In step S1732, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, a rank-up failure effect designation command instructing execution of the rank-up failure effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1735.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1732, the rank-up failure effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c. , And the lighting device 34 for effect.

  In step S1733, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, a rank increase success effect designation command instructing execution of the rank increase success effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1734.

  When the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1733, the rank-up success effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, and the effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c. , And the lighting device 34 for effect.

  In step S1734, the sub CPU 120a clears the rank-up effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1735.

  In step S1735, sub CPU 120a generates an operation specification command according to the operation of effect button 35, cross key 39, or center key 39E, and sets the generated operation specification command in the transmission buffer.

  When receiving the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1729, the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing details of the timer update process (step S1500 in FIG. 89). In FIG. 132, the sub CPU 120a updates the timer counter of the sub RAM 120c by 1 if there is one that is not 0 and updates it (S1501).

  In the next step S1502, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the stage change notification standby counter of the sub RAM 120c is 1 or more. The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1503 when the stage change notification standby counter is 1 or more (S1502: Yes). If the stage change advance notice standby counter is 0 (S1502: No), the current timer update process is ended.

  In the next step S1503, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the timing flag immediately before the variation stop is set in the timing flag storage area immediately before the variation stop of the sub RAM 120c. The timing flag immediately before the change stop is the first hold, the second hold, and the third hold at the time of execution of the stage change advance announcement execution timing determination process (S1625-5 in FIG. 117) in the stage change announcement advance effect selection process. Or, if timing data SCY12, SCY22, SCY32, or SCY42 of the execution timing immediately before the suspension of the fluctuation of the change of the fourth suspension is selected, the stage during the fluctuation of the symbol during the fluctuation digestion proceeds to that fluctuation. It is set in the process (S1669-8 in FIG. 122). If the sub-CPU 120a has set the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop (S1503: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1504. If the timing flag immediately before the fluctuation stop is not set (S1503: No), the current timer update process is ended.

  In the next step S1504, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the timer counter immediately before the variation stop of the sub RAM 120c is zero. If the timer counter immediately before the fluctuation stop is 0 (S1504: Yes), if the timer counter is not 0 (S1504: No), the current timer update process is ended.

  In the next step S1505, the sub CPU 120a finds a new stage after the change in stage change, sets a character related to the new stage as an appearance character, and generates and generates a stage change notice effect staging pattern command to cause this character to appear The selected effect pattern specification command is set in the transmission buffer. In the next step S1506, the sub CPU 120a clears the stage change announcement standby flag in the stage change announcement standby flag storage area. In the next step 1667-7, the sub CPU 120a clears the timing flag immediately before the start of fluctuation. After that, the stage change notice effect control process during the present symbol change is ended.

  As soon as the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 receive the command set in the transmission buffer in step S1505 (immediately before stopping the fluctuation display), the stage change notice effect is displayed on the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, The effect drive devices 33a, 33b, 33c and the effect illumination device 34 are made to execute.

  The above is the details of the present embodiment. According to the present embodiment, cooperation between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 in the gaming machine 1 can be smoothly performed.

Second Embodiment
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the first embodiment, the effect control board 120 performs the change immediately before the stop of the change display immediately before the change display which is to change the stage, immediately after the stop, and the change display. At any timing immediately after the start of the stage change notice effect was to be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the stage control notice 120 of the stage change announcement effect that suggests that the stage change is performed in the variable display only at the timing immediately after the start of the variable display which is to change the stage. Make it possible to do it.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a stage change advance announcement execution timing determination table to be referred to in the stage change advance announcement execution timing determination process (S1625-5 in FIG. 117) in the stage change announcement advance effect selection process. In the table of FIG. 133, in the case of stage change during the 1st pending change display, the selection ratio of the timing data SCY12 and SCY13 other than the timing data SCY11 whose execution timing is immediately after the start of the 1st pending change display is 0 %It has become. When stage change is performed during the second suspension fluctuation display, the timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY13, SCY22, SCY23 other than the timing data SCY21 whose execution timing is immediately after the start of the second suspension fluctuation display is 0 %It has become. In the case of stage change during the third pending change display, timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY22, SCY22, SCY23, SCY32 other than the timing data SCY31 whose execution timing is immediately after the start of the third pending change display. The selectivity of SCY33 is 0%. In the case of stage change during the fourth suspension of fluctuation display, timing data SCY11, SCY12, SCY13, SCY21, SCY21, SCY22, SCY23, SCY31, other than the timing data SCY41 whose execution timing is immediately after the start of the fourth suspension of fluctuation display. The selectivity of SCY32, SCY33, SCY42, and SCY43 is 0%.

  According to this embodiment, the execution of the stage change advance notice effect at any timing other than the timing immediately after the start of the variable display which is to change the stage is restricted. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to further enhance the interest of presentation accompanied by a stage change.

Third Embodiment
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the contents of the command execution mode determination table in the sub ROM 120b are different from those in the first and second embodiments.

  FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1146-1 of the setting change-in-progress special command analysis process of FIG. The contents of the record of each special command of the command execution mode determination table in FIG. 134 are the setting change notification regardless of the presence or absence of the background music stop when the special command is received during the display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode. It erases the image and makes it invisible.

  Explaining in more detail, in the table of FIG. 134, in the record "Disc full error command", the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o" and the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "erasing" Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is “stopped”. In the record "Disc full tank error elimination command", the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command The data shown is “−”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control substrate 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is a full error command. , Display a message image corresponding to the error fill and error command in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music during start-up is stopped, and a message sound corresponding to the error filling error command is output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the flush full error elimination command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the flush full error command and makes the setting change notification image visible again, Stop the output of the message voice corresponding to the error fill-in error command.

  In the “door open error command” record in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating whether or not the command itself needs to be executed is “、”, the data indicating whether or not the image needs to be erased is “erased”, and the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “−”, and the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is “without stop”. In the "door open error cancellation command" record, the data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is "、", the data indicating whether or not deletion of the image is necessary is "erased", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is The data shown is “−”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting change notification image is a door open error command, the image control substrate 150 erases the setting change notification image, Display a message image corresponding to the door open error command at the center of the screen. Further, in this case, the output of background music during start-up is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the door open error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the door open error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the door open error command and makes the setting change notification image visible again, and the door Stop the output of the message voice corresponding to the release error command.

  In the record of “Magnet detection error command” in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “「 ”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is“ erased ”, and the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “−”, and the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is “with stop”. In the record of “Magnet detection error cancellation command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “deletion”, the display position of the image corresponding to the command The data shown is "-", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "with stop".

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 137, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting change notification image is a magnet detection error command, the image control substrate 150 erases the setting change notification image, A message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command is displayed at the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation is stopped, and a message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is a magnet detection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command and makes the setting change notification image visible again, Stop the output of the message voice corresponding to the detection error command.

  In the record of "power on designation command" in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is "o", the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is "erased", and the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “−”, and the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 138, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control substrate 120 during display of the setting change notification image is a power on designation command, Display a message image corresponding to the power on designation command at the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music is maintained during startup.

  In the record of "power recovery specification command" in the table of FIG. 134, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased", and the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “−”, and the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 139, the image control board 150 erases the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control substrate 120 during display of the setting change notification image is a power supply recovery designation command, Display a message image corresponding to the power recovery specification command at the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music is maintained during startup.

  FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1147-1 of the setting change-in-play game command analysis process of FIG. 70. The contents of the record of each game command of the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 140 are the setting change notification regardless of the presence or absence of the background music stop when the game command is received during the display of the setting change notification image in the setting change mode. It is intended to maintain the display of the image.

  More specifically, in the record of “variation start command” in the table of FIG. 140, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”, The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 141, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting change notification image is a change start command, the image control substrate 150 displays the setting change notification image in the image display device 31. Is maintained, and the symbol variation image corresponding to the variation start command is superimposed and displayed on the character of "setting change" in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during activation is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the change start command is output.

  In the record of "start winning combination designation command" in the table of FIG. 140, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is "no deletion", the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “−”, and the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 142, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting change notification image when the command received by the effect control substrate 120 during the display of the setting change notification image is the start winning designation command. And restrict the display of the effect image corresponding to the start winning combination designation command. Further, in this case, the output of background music during start-up is maintained, and the output of the effect sound corresponding to the start winning combination designation command is restricted. That is, when the start winning combination designation command is received while the setting change notification image is displayed, the start winning combination designation command is ignored for the display of the image and the output of the sound.

  In the record of “special game start command (opening specification command)” in the table of FIG. 140, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇” and the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”, The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is “no stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 143, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting change notification image is a special game start command (opening designation command) as shown in FIG. 143, the image display device At 31, the display of the setting change notification image is maintained, and the effect image corresponding to the special game start command (opening specifying command) is superimposed and displayed on the character of "setting changing" at the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation is maintained, and a special game start command (opening designation command) and an effect sound corresponding to the command are output.

  FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1156-1 of the special command analysis process during setting confirmation of FIG. 77. The contents of the record of each special command in the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 144 are the setting confirmation notification regardless of the presence or absence of the background music stop when the special command is received during display of the setting confirmation notification image in the setting confirmation mode. It erases the image and makes it invisible.

  Describing in more detail, in the table of FIG. 144, in the record "Dishan error command" in the table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", and the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erasable" Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is “stopped”. In the record "Disc full tank error elimination command", the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command The data shown is “−”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 145, the image control board 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image when the command received by the effect control substrate 120 during display of the setting confirmation notification image is a counter filling error command. , Display a message image corresponding to the error fill and error command in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music during start-up is stopped, and a message sound corresponding to the error filling error command is output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the flush full error elimination command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the flood full error command and makes the setting confirmation notification image visible again, Stop the output of the message voice corresponding to the error fill-in error command.

  In the record of “door open error command” in the table of FIG. 144, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is “〇”, data indicating whether or not deletion of the image is necessary is “erased”, and an image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “−”, and the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is “without stop”. In the "door open error cancellation command" record, the data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is "、", the data indicating whether or not deletion of the image is necessary is "erased", and the display position of the image corresponding to the command is The data shown is “−”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is “without stop”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 146, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting confirmation notification image is a door open error command, the image control substrate 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image, Display a message image corresponding to the door open error command at the center of the screen. Further, in this case, the output of background music during start-up is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the door open error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the door open error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the door open error command and makes the setting confirmation notification image visible again, and the door Stop the output of the message voice corresponding to the release error command.

  In the record of “Magnet detection error command” in the table of FIG. 144, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is “「 ”, the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is“ erased ”, and the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “−”, and the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is “with stop”. In the record of “Magnet detection error cancellation command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “deletion”, the display position of the image corresponding to the command The data shown is “−”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 147, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting confirmation notification image is a magnet detection error command, the image control substrate 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image, A message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command is displayed at the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation is stopped, and a message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command is output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the magnet detection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command and makes the setting confirmation notification image visible again, Stop the output of the message voice corresponding to the detection error command.

  In the record of "power on designation command" in the table of FIG. 144, the data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is "」 ", the data indicating whether or not erasing of the image is necessary is" erased ", and the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “−”, and the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is “without stop”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the command received while displaying the setting confirmation notification image is a power on designation command, the image control board 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image and turns on the power at the center of the screen. Display the message image corresponding to the specified command. Also, in this case, the output of background music is maintained during startup.

  In the record of "power restoration specification command" in the table of FIG. 144, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is "deletion", and the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “−”, and the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is “without stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 149, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting confirmation notification image is a power recovery specification command, the image control substrate 150 erases the setting confirmation notification image, Display a message image corresponding to the power recovery specification command at the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music is maintained during startup.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table to be referred to in step S1157-1 of the game command analyzing process under setting confirmation of FIG. 84. The contents of the record of each game command of the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 150 are the setting confirmation notification regardless of the presence or absence of the background music stop when the game command is received during the display of the setting confirmation notification image in the setting confirmation mode. It is intended to maintain the display of the image.

  More specifically, in the record of “variation start command” in the table of FIG. 150, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “o”, the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”, The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 151, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting confirmation notification image is a change start command, the image control substrate 150 displays the setting confirmation notification image in the image display device 31. Is maintained, and the symbol variation image corresponding to the variation start command is superimposed and displayed on the character of "setting confirmation" in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during activation is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the change start command is output.

  In the record of "start winning combination designation command" in the table of FIG. 150, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is "no deletion", the image corresponding to the command The data indicating the display position of is “−”, and the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is “with stop”.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 152, the image control board 150 maintains the display of the setting confirmation notification image when the command received by the effect control substrate 120 during the display of the setting confirmation notification image is the start winning designation command. And restrict the display of the effect image corresponding to the start winning combination designation command. Further, in this case, the output of background music during start-up is maintained, and the output of the effect sound corresponding to the start winning combination designation command is restricted. That is, when the start winning combination designation command is received while the setting confirmation notification image is displayed, the start winning combination designation command is ignored for the display of the image and the output of the sound.

  In the record of “special game start command (opening specification command)” in the table of FIG. 150, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇” and the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”, The data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “−”, and the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is “no stop”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 153, when the command received by the effect control board 120 during display of the setting confirmation notification image is a special game start command (opening designation command) as shown in FIG. 153, the image display device At 31, the display of the setting confirmation notification image is maintained, and the effect image corresponding to the special game start command (opening specification command) is superimposed and displayed on the character of "setting confirmation" in the center of the screen. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation is stopped, and a special game start command (opening designation command) and an effect sound corresponding to the command are output. According to the present embodiment, cooperation between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 in the gaming machine 1 can be performed more smoothly.

Fourth Embodiment
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the procedure of determining settings in the setting change mode is different from that of the first to third embodiments. In the first to third embodiments, the operation of turning off the power switch 172 in the setting change mode is the operation of confirming the setting of the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the setting is determined by the operation of the setting key 177 and the RAM clear switch 174. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 154B, when it is desired to confirm the setting, the setting key 177 is returned from the ON state to the OFF state, and the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed while the power switch 127 is in the OFF state. . When this operation is performed, the setting corresponding to the number of monitors 178 at that time (setting 2 corresponding to “0002” in the example of FIG. 154 (B)) is determined as a new setting of the jackpot lottery probability. The setting information of the setting is written to the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c. After this writing, the process shifts to the customer waiting state without passing through the power off process. Further, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), the power switch 127 may be turned off to restart the operation without shifting from the setting change mode to the customer waiting state.

Fifth Embodiment
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the inner configuration of the cover 119 of the main control board 110 is different from that of the first to fourth embodiments (FIG. 23). As shown in FIG. 156, in the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 174, the setting switch 175, and the monitor 178 are provided inside the cover 119 in the main control board 110. The setting switch 175 is an operation means that plays the role of the setting key 177 in the first to fourth embodiments.

  The procedures of the normal activation operation, the RAM clear activation operation, the first special activation operation, and the second special activation operation in this embodiment are as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in the normal start-up operation, the setting switch 175 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the normal start-up operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 restores the data in the main RAM 110c in the initialization processing, and performs the processing in the normal mode after the end of the initialization processing.

  As shown in FIG. 158, in the RAM clear activation operation, the setting switch 175 is turned off, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned on, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the RAM clear activation operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 clears the main RAM 110c in the initialization processing, and performs the processing of the normal mode after the completion of the initialization processing.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (A), in the first special activation operation, the setting switch 175 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the first special activation operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 performs a process of setting change mode in the initialization process.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (B), when it is desired to change the setting of the jackpot lottery probability in the setting change mode, the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed. Every time the RAM clear switch 174 is pressed once, the number of monitors 178 changes cyclically as "0002"-> "0003"-> "0004"-> "0005"-> "0006"-> "0001". When it is desired to determine the setting of the jackpot lottery probability, the power switch 172 is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 160, in the second special activation operation, the setting switch 175 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned on, and the power switch 172 is turned on. When the second special activation operation is performed, the gaming machine 1 performs the process of the setting confirmation mode in the initialization process.

Sixth Embodiment
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the procedure of determining settings in the setting change mode is different from that of the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the operation of turning off the power switch 172 in the setting change mode is the operation of confirming the setting of the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the setting is determined by the operation of the setting switch 175. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161 (B), when it is desired to confirm the setting, the RAM clear switch 174 is turned off, and the setting switch 175 is pressed while the power switch 127 is turned on. When this operation is performed, the setting corresponding to the number of monitors 178 at that time (setting 2 corresponding to “0002” in the example of FIG. 161 (B)) is determined as a new setting of the jackpot lottery probability. The setting information of the setting is written to the setting information storage area of the main RAM 110c. After this writing, the process shifts to the customer waiting state without passing through the power off process. Also, as shown in FIG. 162B, pressing of the RAM clear switch 174 is an operation to change the setting, pressing of the setting switch 175 is an operation to confirm the setting, and transition from the setting change mode to the customer waiting state is Alternatively, the power switch 127 may be turned off to restart the operation.

Seventh Embodiment
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the operation of changing the setting and the operation of fixing the setting in the setting change mode are the reverse of those in the sixth embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163 (B), the depression of the setting switch 175 is an operation for changing the setting, and the depression of the RAM clear switch 174 is an operation for confirming the setting. Migrate to Also, as shown in FIG. 164B, pressing of the setting switch 175 is an operation to change the setting, pressing of the RAM clear switch 174 is an operation to confirm the setting, and transition from the setting change mode to the customer waiting state is Alternatively, the power switch 127 may be turned off to restart the operation.

Eighth Embodiment
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. The present embodiment differs from the first to seventh embodiments in the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1146-1 of the special command analysis processing during setting change (FIG. 62). FIG. 165 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1146-1. The contents of the record of each special command of the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 165 are the setting change notification when a specific special command (a magnet detection error command and a vibration detection error command) is received while the setting change notification image is displayed. When the image is erased and a special command other than a specific special command is received, the display of the setting change notification image is maintained.

  Specifically, in the records of “Magnet detection error command” and “Vibration detection error command” in the table of FIG. 165, data indicating necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, indicating necessity of image deletion. The data is "erased". In the other records, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, and the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”.

The Ninth Embodiment
An eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The present embodiment is different from those of the first to eighth embodiments in the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1147-1 of the setting change in-progress game command analysis process (FIG. 70). FIG. 166 is a diagram of a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1147-1. The contents of the record of each game command of the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 166 are the setting change notification image when the specific game command (the variation start command and the opening designation command) is received while the setting change notification image is displayed. When the special command other than the specific game command is deleted, the display of the setting change notification image is maintained.

  Specifically, in the records of "variation start command" and "opening designation command" in the table of FIG. 166, data indicating whether execution of the command itself is necessary is "o" and data indicating necessity of erasing the image is It is "erased". In the other records, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, and the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”.

Tenth Embodiment
A ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The present embodiment differs from the first to ninth embodiments in the command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1156-1 of the special command analysis processing during setting confirmation (FIG. 77). FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1156-1. The contents of the record of each special command of the command execution mode determination table in FIG. 167 are the setting confirmation notification when a specific special command (a magnet detection error command and a vibration detection error command) is received while the setting confirmation notification image is displayed. When the image is erased and a special command other than a specific special command is received, the display of the setting confirmation notification image is maintained.

  Specifically, in the records of “Magnet detection error command” and “Vibration detection error command” in the table of FIG. 167, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, indicating the necessity of erasing the image. The data is "erased". In the other records, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, and the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”.

Eleventh Embodiment
A tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The present embodiment differs from the first to tenth embodiments in the command execution mode determination table to be referred to in step S1157-1 of the setting confirmation game command analysis process (FIG. 84). FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1157-1. The contents of the record of each game command of the command execution mode determination table of FIG. 168 are the setting confirmation notification image when the specific game command (the variation start command and the opening designation command) is received while the setting confirmation notification image is displayed. When the special command other than the specific game command is deleted, the display of the setting confirmation notification image is maintained.

  Specifically, in the records of "variation start command" and "opening designation command" in the table of FIG. 167, data indicating necessity of execution of the command itself is "o" and data indicating necessity of deletion of the image is It is "erased". In the other records, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, and the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”.

As mentioned above, although 1st-11th embodiment of the present invention was described, the following modification may be added to this embodiment.
(1) In the first to eleventh embodiments, the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine. However, the present invention may be applied to a slot game machine.

(2) In S1146-6, S1147-6, S1156-6, and S11157-6 in the first to eleventh embodiments, the deletion designation command instructing deletion of the display image (setting change notification image, setting confirmation notification image) Instead of this, a command may be set to draw another image such as a single color image in a layer above the drawing layer of the display image. As long as it is a command that can make a display image invisible, it may send a command instructing deletion of the display image itself, or a command instructing to overwrite another image on the display image. .

(3) In the first to eleventh embodiments, the display position of the message image corresponding to the command when the command is sent from the main control board 110 to the sub CPU 120 a while the setting change notification image or the setting confirmation notification image is displayed. Was either the center of the screen or the upper right corner of the screen. However, the display position of the message image may be in the lower right corner, the upper left corner, or the lower left corner.

(4) In the first to eleventh embodiments, when the first special activation operation is performed, the setting change command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and the setting is triggered by the transmission of the setting change command. Change Change image was to be displayed. In addition, when the second special activation operation is performed, a setting confirmation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and a setting confirmation notification image is displayed upon transmission of the setting confirmation command. The However, when the first special activation operation or the second special activation operation is performed, the setting change command or the setting confirmation command is not transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is During the period, the game standby image (FIG. 57) may be continuously displayed. Furthermore, when the setting change command or the setting confirmation command is received while the image corresponding to the predetermined command is displayed, the image corresponding to the predetermined command may not be visible. In addition, when the setting change command or the setting confirmation command is received while the image corresponding to the predetermined command is displayed, the display of the image corresponding to the predetermined command may be maintained.

(5) In the first to eleventh embodiments, the record corresponding to the received command in the command execution mode determination table indicates that the data indicating the necessity of the execution of the command itself is "o" and the necessity of the deletion of the image is When the data is "no erasure" and the data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "center", the setting change notification image and the setting confirmation notification image are received in such a manner that some characters can be seen. The command and the corresponding message image were superimposed and displayed. However, the message image corresponding to the received command may be superimposed and displayed in such a manner that the characters of the setting change notification image and the setting confirmation notification image are completely hidden. In short, the image corresponding to the received command may be superimposed and displayed on at least a part of the setting change notification image or the setting confirmation notification image.

(6) In the first to eleventh embodiments, the advance notice effect for losing is performed with a predetermined probability only when the big hit determination result is a loss. On the other hand, the offender notice effect may be executed as part of a so-called contradiction effect. In this modified example, it is likely to be decided in a lost mode such as a lost reach effect (a left symbol 36L, a middle symbol 36C, a right symbol 36R in reach mode and then a temporary stop in the lost mode), a challenge failure effect, and a battle failure effect After the effect, only when the jackpot notification effect is executed after the execution of the surprise operation effect which is the resurrection effect, the loss advance notice effect may be performed with a predetermined probability.

  According to this modification, even when the out-of-office notice production is executed, there is a possibility that it proceeds to the big hit notification production through the surprise operation production without proceeding to the loss notification production as it is with very low probability. Therefore, even when the advance notice effect is executed, the game can be advanced without losing the player's expectation.

(7) In the first to eleventh embodiments, the words “...” are not selected when the jackpot determination result is the jackpot, and the operation result of “. The effect to advance to was a lost advance notice effect that predicts that the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are determined (completely stopped) in the lost mode. On the other hand, the loss advance notice effect of proceeding from the operation promotion effect to the line of “...” May be executed as part of the so-called contradiction effect. In this modification, after the loss advance notice effect of proceeding from the operation promotion effect to the operation result of “...”, The effect of temporarily stopping the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C and the right symbol 36R in the lost mode, challenge failure effect, battle From the operation promotion effect with a predetermined probability, only when a big hit notification effect is executed after executing the effect that is likely to be decided in a lost manner such as a failure effect, and then executing a surprise operation effect that is a resurrection effect. An effect of advancing to the operation result of “” may be executed.

  According to this modification, even when the effect that the words “...” Appear is executed, it may proceed to the jackpot notification effect through the surprise operation effect without proceeding to the loss notification effect as it is. Therefore, even when the effect that the words "..." appear is executed, the game can be advanced without losing the player's expectation.

(8) In the first to eleventh embodiments described above, all of the modes of stopping the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R during determination during the variable display of symbols are temporary stops (stop while shaking slightly). there were. However, it is good also as a reach effect to be re-varied after completely stopping the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C and the right symbol 36R in the reach mode before confirmation in the variation display of the symbols. In addition, the effect of causing the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R to be completely stopped in the lost mode and then re-varied may be used as the lost temporary stop effect.

(9) In the first to eleventh embodiments, the live mode (the special mode which shifts when a win is won) is continued until the jackpot is won again. However, the live mode may be winning again for the jackpot, or may continue until the number of times of variation of the symbol reaches a predetermined number without winning for the jackpot.

(10) In the first to eleventh embodiments, when it is determined that the stage change is to be performed in the fluctuation at the execution time of the stage change execution determination process (at the time of starting winning), the stage change advance presentation execution determination process The stage change notice production was never performed. However, even if the stage change is performed in the variation, the stage change notice effect may be performed before that. In this case, it is preferable to execute a stage change notice effect for giving a notice of stage change in the change only immediately after the start of the change.

(10) In the first to eleventh embodiments, as the operation check command generated by the debugging dedicated substrate, the factory shipping substrate, or the inspection personal computer and transmitted to the effect control substrate 120, the fluctuation start command and the magnet are used. I gave a command for detection. However, the debug special board, the factory default board, or the command generated by the inspection personal computer is a symbol designation command, a special symbol hold number designation command, a variable stop command, a customer wait designation command, a start winning designation command, a round start command , Opening specification command, ending specification command, gaming state specification command, power on specification command, RAM clear specification command, power recovery specification command, counter full error command, counter case error command, counting switch disconnection error command, no ball error command Dispensing excess error command Dispensing command error command Door opening error command Switch unconnected error command Abnormal prize winning error command Discharging error command Vibration detection error command Dish full error solution Command, counter case error cancellation command, counting switch disconnection error cancellation command, no ball error cancellation command, overdelivery error cancellation command, payout command error cancellation command, door opening error cancellation command, switch non-connection error cancellation command, abnormal prize error cancellation The command may be one or more of a command, an ejection error cancellation command, a magnet detection error cancellation command, and a vibration detection error cancellation command. In this case, regardless of whether the effect control board 120 generated the command is the main control board 110 or a board dedicated for debugging, a board for factory shipment, or a personal computer for inspection, Similar processing should be performed.

(11) In the first to eleventh embodiments, when the power-on designation command is received during display of the setting change notification image, the message image corresponding to the power-on designation command is displayed while maintaining the characters being changed. Do you want to stop the output of background music during startup (Fig. 67), delete the characters under constant change, display the message image corresponding to the power on designation command, and maintain the output of background music during startup ( It was either of FIG. 138). However, the setting change character may be maintained, a message image corresponding to the power-on designation command may be displayed, and the output of background music during activation may be stopped. In short, all the processing before receiving the power on designation command may be ended, and the processing corresponding to the power on designation command may be performed again.

(12) In the first to eleventh embodiments, when the power on designation command is received while the setting confirmation notification image is displayed, the message image corresponding to the power on designation command is displayed while maintaining the character under the setting confirmation. Do you want to stop the output of background music during startup (Fig. 82) or delete the character during constant change and display the message image corresponding to the power on designation command and maintain the output of background music during startup ( It was either of FIG. However, the characters in the setting confirmation may be maintained, a message image corresponding to the power-on designation command may be displayed, and the output of background music during activation may be stopped. In short, all the processing before receiving the power on designation command may be ended, and the processing corresponding to the power on designation command may be performed again.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine, 2 ... Game board, 14 ... 1st starting opening, 14a ... 1st starting opening detection switch, 15 ... 2nd starting opening, 15a ... 2nd starting opening detection switch, 16 ... 1st big winning opening, 16a: first large winning opening detection switch, 17: second large winning opening, 17a: second large winning opening detection switch, 20: first special symbol display device, 21: second special symbol display device, 31: image display Device 110 110 main control board 110a main CPU 110b main ROM 110c main RAM 120 effect control board 120a sub CPU 120b sub ROM 120c sub RAM 150 image control board

Claims (1)

Main control means capable of executing each lottery including a jackpot lottery, controlling the progress of the game based on the result of the lottery, and generating a plurality of types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game;
Rendering means for displaying an image and outputting a sound;
Effect control means for receiving commands in the main control means, determining control content of the effect means based on the received commands, and controlling the effect means according to the determination;
An operating means for performing an operation related to setting of the main control means;
Each of the main control means and the effect control means is capable of independent operation triggered by power on,
When the power is turned on with the operation means in a predetermined state, the main control means shifts to a setting mode relating to settings relating to the lottery,
A game machine characterized in that the effect control means displays an image corresponding to the predetermined command when the command received when the main control means is in the setting mode is a predetermined command.